674747

Yaesu FTDX1200 Manual

66
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/140
Next page
HF/50 MHZ TRANSCEIVER
FT
DX
1200
OPERATING MANUAL
YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD.
Tennozu Parkside Building
2-5-8 Higashi-Shinagawa, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 140-0002 Japan
YAESU USA
6125 Phyllis Drive, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A.
YAESU UK
Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close
Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K.
YAESU HK
Unit 2002, 20/F, 9 Chong Yip Street,
Kwun Tong, Kowloon, Hong Kong
ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . .
The
FT
DX
1200
is a leading-edge transceiver with a number of new and exciting features, some of which may be unfa-
miliar to you ,n order to gain the most enMoyment and oSerating ef¿ciency from your
FT
DX
1200
, we recommend that
you read this manual in its entirety, and keep it handy for reference as you explore the many capabilities of your new
transceiver.
Before using your
FT
DX
1200
, be sure to read and follow the instructions in the “Before You Begin” section of this man-
ual.
Page 1FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Congratulations on the purchase of your Yaesu amateur
transceiver ,f this is your ¿rst rig, or if Yaesu eTuipment
is already the backbone of your station, rest assured
your transceiver will provide many hours of operating
pleasure for years to come.
The
FT
DX
1200
is an elite-class HF transceiver provid-
ing exceptional performance both on transmit and re-
ceive. The
FT
DX
1200
is designed for the most competi-
tive operating situations, whether you primarily operate
in contest, ';, or digital-mode environments.
Built on the foundation of the popular
FT
DX
9000
trans-
ceiver, and carrying on the proud tradition of the
FT-
1000
series, the
FT
DX
1200
provides up to 100 Watts
of power output on 66B, CW, and F0  Watts $0
carrier. 'igital 6ignal 3rocessing '63 is utili]ed
throughout the design, providing leading-edge transmit-
ter and receiver performance.
For exceptional protection from strong signal interfer-
ence, the optional 5F Tuning .its may be connected
via the rear panel. The 5F Tuning .its provide extraor-
dinarily sharp selectivity and protect your receiver from
close-in interference on a crowded band.
,n the front end, you may select one of two 5F pream-
pli¿ers, or ,32 ,ntercept 3oint 2ptimi]ation, providing
direct feed to the ¿rst mixer. Three levels of 5F attenua-
tion are available in 6-dB steps.
The
FT
DX
1200
receiver utili]es '63 ¿ltering, incorpo-
rating many of the features of the
FT
DX
9000
, such as
9ariable Bandwidth, ,F 6hift, and 3assband Contour
tuning. $lso provided are 'igital 1oise 5eduction, 'igi-
tal $uto-1otch Filtering and a manually tuned ,F 1otch
¿lter.
2n the transmit side, the Yaesu exclusive Three-Band
3arametric 0icrophone (Tuali]er allows precise and
flexible adjustment of the waveform created by your
voice and microphone. The audio $mplitude, Center
FreTuency, and Bandwidth are adjusted separately for
the low, mid-range, and high-freTuency audio spectrum.
The transmitted bandwidth may also be adjusted.
$dvanced features include 'irect .eyboard FreTuency
(ntry and Band Change, 6peech 3rocessor, ,F 0onitor
for 9oice modes, CW 3itch control, CW 6pot switch,
Full CW 46., CW 0essage 0emory, adjustable ,F
1oise Blanker, and all mode 6Tuelch. Two T;5;
antenna ports are provided on the rear panel. Two key
jacks are provided one on the front and one on the rear
panel
. The key jacks may be con¿gured independently
for paddle input, connection to a straight key, or com-
puter-driven keying interface.
FreTuency setup is straightforward on the
FT
DX
1200
.
(nter freTuency directly for 9F2-$. 6eparate keys are
available for band selection. (ach band key provides
three separate 9F2 settings for three different parts of
each band. You may create three independent 9F2 set-
tings of freTuency, mode, and ¿lter for each band.
,n addition,  memories are provided to store FreTuen-
cy, 0ode, ,F ¿lter selection, Clari¿er offset, and 6can-
skip status. Whats more, five Tuick-recall “40B”
memories can instantly store operational settings at the
push of a button.
The built-in antenna tuner includes 100 memories that
automatically store antenna matching settings for rapid,
later automatic recall.
Interfacing for digital modes is extremely simple with
the
FT
DX
1200
, thanks to the dedicated 5TTY'$T$
connection jack on the rear panel. 2ptimi]ation of the
¿lter passband, '63 settings, carrier insertion point, and
display offset for digital modes, is possible via the 0enu
programming system.
$dvanced technology is only part of the
FT
DX
1200
story. Yaesu stands behind our products with a world-
wide network of dealers and service centers. We greatly
appreciate your investment in the
FT
DX
1200
, and we
look forward to helping you get the most enjoyment
from your new transceiver. 3lease feel free to contact
your nearest dealer, or one of Yaesus national headTuar-
ters of¿ces, for technical advice, interfacing assistance,
or accessory recommendation. Watch Yaesu 8.6.$.s
Home 3age for late-breaking information about 6tan-
dard Hori]on and Yaesu products httpwww.yaesu.
com.
3lease read this manual thoroughly, to gain maximum
understanding of the full capability of the
FT
DX
1200
.
We thank you again for your purchase!
Page 2 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General Description .....................................................1
Table of Contents .........................................................2
Accessories & Options ................................................. 4
6upplied $ccessories ................................................ 4
$vailable 2ptions .....................................................
Before You Begin .......................................................... 6
(xtending the Front Feet .......................................... 6
$djusting the 0ain Tuning 'ial TorTue .................. 6
$djusting the Clock .................................................. 7
5esetting the 0icroprocessor ................................... 7
Installation and Interconnections ............................... 8
$ntenna Considerations ........................................... 8
$bout Coaxial Cable ................................................ 8
Grounding .................................................................
Connection of $ntenna and 3ower Cables ............. 10
Connection of 0icrophone and Headphone ........... 11
.ey, .eyer, and Computer-'riven .eying
Interconnections ..................................................... 1
9/-1000 /inear $mpli¿er Interconnections .......... 13
Interfacing to 2ther /inear $mpli¿ers ................... 14
Plug/Connector Pinout Diagrams ............................. 15
Front Panel Controls & Switches ............................. 16
Display Indications..................................................... 26
Rear Panel ...................................................................29
Optional FH-2 Switches ............................................. 31
Basic Operation: Receiving on Amateur Bands ...... 32
2peration on 60-0eter
0H]
)
Band
8.6. and 8... version only
) .... 3
C/$5
Clari¿er
)
2peration ................................... 36
/2C. ..................................................................... 37
'I00(5 ............................................................... 37
9F2 C2/25 ......................................................... 37
Convenience Features ................................................ 38
Band 6tack 2peration ............................................. 38
C.S
Custom Switch
) .............................................. 38
SC23( ................................................................... 3
5otator Control Functions ...................................... 4
0ore FreTuency 1avigation TechniTues ............... 43
$ntenna Selection .................................................. 44
5eceiver 2peration
Front (nd Block 'iagram
) ... 4
Interference Rejection ............................................... 46
$TT ......................................................................... 46
-T
UNE FILTER
(
REQUIRES THE OPTIONAL
RF TUNING KIT
) ... 47
I32
Intercept 3oint 2ptimi]ation
) ........................ 4
5.F/T
5oo¿ng Filters
) .......................................... 0
IF 1oise Blanker
1B
)
2peration .......................... 1
C21T285 Control 2peration .............................. 
IF SHIFT 2peration
SSBCW5TTY3.T 0odes
) ........ 3
WI'TH
IF 'S3 Bandwidth
)
Tuning
SSBCW5TTY'$T$ 0odes
) ........ 4
1$552W
1$5
)
2ne-Touch IF Filter Selection . 
IF 12
TCH Filter 2peration
SSBCW5TTY'$T$$0 0odes
) ....... 6
'igital 12TCH Filter
'1F
)
2peration ................ 7
'igital 1oise 5eduction
'15
)
2peration ............ 7
Tools for Comfortable and Effective Reception ...... 58
5F Gain .................................................................. 8
'S3 IF Filter Types ................................................ 
$udio 3itch Control
SSB mode
) ........................... 60
$udio 3eak Filter ................................................... 60
$GC
$utomatic Gain Control
) ............................. 61
$djustable 5eceiver $udio Filter ........................... 6
SSB/AM Mode Transmission .................................... 63
Using the Automatic Antenna Tuner ........................65
$T8 2peration ....................................................... 6
$bout $T8 2peration ............................................ 66
Enhancing Transmit Signal Quality ......................... 67
3arametric 0icrophone
(Tuali]er
SSB$0F0 mode
) ...... 67
8sing the Speech 3rocessor
SSB 0ode
) .............. 6
$djusting the SSB Transmitted Bandwidth
SSB 0ode) ....... 70
Transmitter Convenience Features ..........................71
9oice 0emory SSB$0F0 modes
5eTuires optional '9S-6 and FH-) .... 71
92; SSB$0F0 0odes $utomatic T;5;
Switching using Voice Control) ............................. 73
021IT25 SSB$0F0 modes) ......................... 74
Split 2peration 8sing the T; Clari¿er .................. 7
Split-FreTuency 2peration ..................................... 76
CW Mode Operation ................................................. 77
Setup for Straight .ey
and Straight .ey emulation
)
2peration ..... 77
8sing the Built-in (lectronic .eyer ....................... 78
CW Convenience Features ........................................ 81
CW Spotting
Zero-Beating
) .................................. 81
8sing CW 5everse ................................................. 8
CW 'elay Time Setting ......................................... 83
CW 3itch $djustment ............................................. 83
Contest 0emory .eyer 8sing the 2ptional
FH- 5emote Control .eypad) ....... 84
CW 'ecode ............................................................ 8
FM Mode Operation ..................................................90
Basic 2peration ...................................................... 0
5epeater 2peration ................................................. 1
Tone STuelch 2peration ......................................... 
Memory Operation .................................................... 93
Convenient 0emory functions ............................... 3
40B
4uick 0emory Bank
) ................................. 3
Standard 0emory 2peration .................................. 4
0emory Groups ..................................................... 8
Page 3FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Operation on Alaska Emergency Frequency:
5167.5 khz (U.S. Version Only) .................................99
VFO and Memory Scanning ................................... 100
VF2 Scanning ...................................................... 100
0emory Scan ....................................................... 101
PMS (Programmable Memory Scanning) ............. 102
RTTY
(
Radio Teletype
)
Operation ......................... 103
5TTY 'ecode
with 2ptional FFT 8nit
) ............. 103
5TTY Text 0emory
with 2ptional FFT 8nit
) ... 104
(xample of Connecting 5TTY Communications
'evice ................................................................... 104
DATA (PSK) Operation ........................................... 105
3S. 'ecode
with 2ptional FFT 8nit
) ................ 10
3S. Text 0emory
with 2ptional FFT 8nit
) ...... 106
(xample of 'ata Communications 'evice ......... 106
Menu Mode ............................................................... 107
$GC Group .......................................................... 11
'IS3/$Y Group .................................................. 11
'VS Group ........................................................... 113
.(Y(5 Group ..................................................... 113
G(1(5$/ Group ................................................ 114
02'(
-$0 Group ............................................... 116
02'(-CW Group ............................................... 116
02'(-'$T$ Group ........................................... 117
02'(-F0 Group ................................................ 118
02'(-5TTY Group ........................................... 11
02'(-SSB Group .............................................. 11
5; 'S3 Group ..................................................... 10
SC23( Group ...................................................... 11
T81I1G Group ................................................... 13
T; $8'I2 Group ................................................ 13
T; G15/ Group .................................................. 1
$F SC23( Group ................................................ 1
'(C CW............................................................... 1
(' 5TTY Group ................................................. 16
(' 3S. Group .................................................... 16
Installation of Optional Accessories ....................... 127
FFT 8nit FFT-1) ................................................. 17
Voice 0emory 8nit 'VS-6) ............................... 18
5F ȝTuning
.it .................................................... 1
FC-40 (xternal $utomatic $ntenna Tuner for Wire
$ntenna) ............................................................... 130
SCU-17 USB Interface Unit ................................. 13
6SHFL¿FDWLRQV ............................................................ 134
Page 4 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
ACCESSORIES & OPTIONS
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Hand 0icrophone
MH-31
B8
)
1 pc $0780001
'C 3ower Cord 1 pc T0
Spare Fuse
25A
) 1 pc Q0000074
5C$ 3lug pcs 300136
2perating 0anual 1 pc
Warranty Card 1 pc
Page 5FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
ACCESSORIES & OPTIONS
AVAILABLE OPTIONS
MD-200
A8X
Ultra-High-Fidelity 'esktop 0icrophone
MD-100
A8X
'esktop 0icrophone
YH-77STA
Lightweight Stereo Headphone
FH-2
5emote Control .eypad
VL-1000/VP-1000
Linear $mpli¿er$C 3ower Supply
RF μTuning Kit A
For 160 m Band
RF μTuning Kit B
For 8040 m Bands
RF μTuning Kit C
For 300 m Bands
FC-40
(xternal $utomatic $ntenna Tuner
FP-1030A
(xternal 3ower Supply 13.8 V'C  $)
FP-2023A
(xternal 3ower Supply 13.8 V'C 3 $, US$ 2nly)
DVS-6
Voice 0emory Unit
FFT-1
FFT Unit
SCU-17
USB Interface Unit
CT-118
VL-1000
Linear $mpli¿er Connection Cable
CT-39A
3acket Interface Cable
CT Cable
0'I163 - 0'I163 m) $ntenna 5otator Connection Cable 31 T1016)
CT Cable 0'I1103 - Bare Wire m) Linear $mpli¿er Connection Cable 31 T0741)
MD-200
A8X
YH-77STA FH-2
VL-1000/VP-1000
RF μTuning Kit DVS-6FC-40
FFT-1 SCU-17
Page 6 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
EXTENDING THE FRONT FEET
To elevate the front panel for easy viewing, the front left and right feet on the case bottom may be extended.
3ull the front legs outward from the bottom panel.
5otate the legs counter-clockwise to lock them in
the extended position. Be sure the legs have locked
securely in place, because the transceiver is Tuite
heavy and an unlocked leg could result in damage,
should the transceiver move suddenly.
Retracting the Front Feet
5otate the legs clockwise.
3ush them inward while continuing to rotate clock-
wise. The front feet should now be locked in the re-
tracted position.
ADJUSTING THE MAIN TUNING DIAL TORQUE
The torTue drag) of the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob may be
adjusted according to your preferences. 5otate the skirt
at the base of the knob clockwise to reduce the drag, or
counter-clockwise to increase the drag.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
c
Ð
d
Í
c
Î
d
Ï
Skirt
Page 7FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
[
POWER
]
button
[
BAND
]
keys
[
A
X
M
]
button
[
C.S
]
button
[
ENT
]
button
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
RESETTING THE MICROPROCESSOR
RESETTING MEMORIES
(
ONLY
)
Use this procedure to reset clear) the previously stored
0emory channels, without affecting any con¿guration
changes you may have made to the 0enu settings.
1. 3ress the front panel
[
POWER
]
switch to turn the
transceiver off.
. While holding the
[
A
X
M
]
button in, press and hold
in the front panel
[
POWER
]
switch to turn the trans-
ceiver on. 2nce the transceiver comes on, you may
release the buttons.
MENU RESETTING
Use this procedure to restore the 0enu settings to their
factory defaults, without affecting the memories you
have programmed.
1. 3ress the front panel
[
POWER
]
switch to turn the
transceiver off.
. While holding the
[
MENU
]
button in, press and hold
in the front panel
[
POWER
]
switch to turn the trans-
ceiver on. 2nce the transceiver comes on, you may
release the buttons.
FULL RESET
Use this procedure to restore all 0enu and 0emory set-
tings to their original factory defaults. $ll 0emories will
be cleared by this procedure.
1. 3ress the front panel
[
POWER
]
switch to turn the
transceiver off.
. While holding the
[
FAST
]
and
[
LOCK
]
buttons in,
press and hold in the front panel
[
POWER
]
switch
to turn the transceiver on. 2nce the transceiver
comes on, you may release the buttons.
I
MPORTANT NOTE:
When the optional Tuning .it is connected to the
FT
DX
1200
, disconnect all the cables from the Tuning
.it before performing the Full 5eset.
[
LOCK
]
button
[
FAST
]
button
[
POWER
]
button
[
MENU
]
button
[
POWER
]
button
ADJUSTING THE CLOCK
Use the following procedure to adjust the clock shown at the middle right of the TFT display.
1. 3ress and hold the [
C.S
] button until the clock digits
blink.
. (nter the present time with the number keys
[
BAND
]
keys).
3. 3ress the [
ENT
] button.
Page 8 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
ANTENNA CONSIDERATIONS
The
FT
DX
1200
is designed for use with any antenna system providing a 0 2hm resistive impedance at the desired op-
erating freTuency. While minor excursions from the 0-2hm speci¿cation are of no conseTuence, if the Standing Wave
5atio SW5) present at the $ntenna jack is greater than 31, the transceivers $utomatic $ntenna Tuner may not be able
to reduce the impedance mismatch to an acceptable value.
(very effort should be made to ensure that the impedance of the antenna system be as close as possible to the speci¿ed
0-2hm value. 1ote that the “G5V” type antenna does not provide a 0-2hm impedance on all HF $mateur bands. $n
external wide-range antenna coupler must be used with this antenna type.
$ny antenna to be used with the
FT
DX
1200
must be fed from the transceiver with 0 2hm coaxial cable. Therefore,
when using a “balanced” antenna such as a dipole, remember that a balun or other matchingbalancing device must be
used to ensure proper antenna performance.
The same precautions apply to any additional receive-only) antennas connected to the antenna jacks. if your receive-
only antennas do not have impedance near 0 2hms at the operating freTuency, you may need to install an external an-
tenna tuner to obtain optimum performance.
ABOUT COAXIAL CABLE
Use high-Tuality 0-2hm coaxial cable for the lead-in to your
FT
DX
1200
transceiver. $ll efforts at providing an ef-
¿cient antenna system will be wasted if poor Tuality, lossy coaxial cable is used. This transceiver utili]es standard “0”
“3L-”) type connectors.
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
TYPICAL PL-259 INSTALLATION
Page 9FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
PROPER GROUND CONNECTION
GND
Transceiver
GND
Linear
Amplifier
GND
TNC
"Dais
y
Chain"
GND
Linear
Amplifier
GND
TNC
GND
Transceiver
IMPROPER GROUND CONNECTION
GROUNDING
The
FT
DX
1200
transceiver, like any other HF communications apparatus, reTuires an effective ground system for maxi-
mum electrical safety and best communications effectiveness. $ good ground system can contribute to station ef¿ciency
in a number of ways
It can minimi]e the possibility of electrical shock to the operator.
It can minimi]e 5F currents Àowing on the shield of the coaxial cable and the chassis of the transceiver. such cur-
rents may lead to radiation, which can cause interference to home entertainment devices or laboratory test eTuip-
ment.
It can minimi]e the possibility of erratic transceiveraccessory operation caused by 5F feedback andor improper
current Àow through logic devices.
$n effective earth ground system may take several forms. for a more complete discussion, see an appropriate 5F engi-
neering text. The information below is intended only as a guideline.
Typically, the ground connection consists of one or more copper-clad steel rods, driven into the ground. If multiple
ground rods are used, they should be positioned in a “V” con¿guration and bonded together at the base of the “V” which
is nearest the station location. Use a heavy, braided cable such as the discarded shield from type 5G-13 coaxial cable)
and strong cable clamps to secure the braided cables) to the ground rods. Be sure to weatherproof the connections
to ensure many years of reliable service. Use the same type of heavy, braided cable for the connections to the station
ground bus described below).
Inside the station, a common ground bus consisting of a copper pipe of at least  mm diameter should be used. $n al-
ternative station ground bus may consist of a wide copper plate single-sided circuit board material is ideal) secured to
the bottom of the operating desk. Grounding connections from individual transceivers, power supplies, and data com-
munications devices T1Cs, etc.) should be made directly to the ground bus using a heavy, braided cable.
'o not “'aisy-Chain” ground connections from one electrical device to another and thence to the ground bus. This
method may nullify any attempt at effective radio freTuency grounding. See the drawing below for examples of proper
grounding techniTues.
Inspect the ground system - inside the station as well as outside - on a regular basis to ensure continued performance
and safety.
Besides following the above guidelines carefully, note that household or industrial gas lines must never be used in an
attempt to establish an electrical ground. Cold water pipes may, in some instances, help in the grounding effort, but gas
lines represent a signi¿cant explosion ha]ard, and must never be used.
Page 10 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CONNECTION OF ANTENNA AND POWER CABLES
3lease follow the outline in the illustration regarding the proper connection of antenna coaxial cables, as well as the 'C
power cable. The 'C power connector for the
FT
DX
1200
must only be connected to a 'C source providing 13.8 Volts 'C
10 ), and capable of at least 3 $mperes of current. $lways observe proper polarity when making 'C connection
The RED DC power lead connects to the Positive (+) DC terminal.
The BLACK DC power lead connects to the Negative (–) DC terminal.
We recommend the use of the
FP-1030A
US$ market only) $C 3ower Supply. 2ther models of power supplies may
be used with the
FT
DX
1200
, but the 13.8 V'C input voltage, 3 $mpere current capability, and 'C cable polarity
guidelines described above must be strictly followed.
1ote that other manufacturers may use the same type of 'C power connections as does your
FT
DX
1200
transceiver,
however, the wiring con¿guration may be different from that speci¿ed for your transceiver. Serious damage can be
caused if improper 'C connections are made consult with a Tuali¿ed service technician when in doubt.
The 100 V 5F voltage #100 W0-ohm) is applied to the T; 5F section of the transceiver while transmitting.
'o not touch the T; 5F section absolutely while transmitting.
3ermanent damage can result when improper supply voltage, or reverse-polarity voltage, is applied to the
FT
DX
1200
. The Limited Warranty on this transceiver does not cover damage caused by application of $C volt-
age, reverse polarity 'C, or 'C voltage outside the speci¿ed range of 13.8 V 10 . When replacing fuses, be certain
to use a fuse of the proper rating. The
FT
DX
1200
reTuires a  $ blade fuse.
ADVICE:
'o not position the
FT
DX
1200
in a location with direct exposure to sunshine.
'o not position the
FT
DX
1200
in a location exposed to dust andor high humidity.
(nsure adeTuate ventilation around the
FT
DX
1200
, to prevent heat build-up and possible reduction of performance
due to high heat.
'o not install the
FT
DX
1200
on an unstable desk or table. 'o not place in a location where objects may fall onto it from above.
To minimi]e the possibility of interference to home entertainment devices, take all precautionary steps including
separation of TVF0 antennas from $mateur transmitting antennas to the greatest extent possible, and keep trans-
mitting coaxial cables separated from cables connected to home entertainment devices.
(nsure that the 'C power cord is not subject to undue stress or bending, which could damage the cable or cause it to
be accidentally unplugged from the rear panel
DC IN
jack.
Be certain to install your transmitting antennas) so they cannot possibly come in contact with TVF0 radio or other
antennas, or with power or telephone lines.
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
To prevent damage from
lightning, atmospheric elec-
tricity, electrical shock etc., please
provide a good earth ground.
Use a short,
thick, braided
cable to con-
nect your station
eTuipment to the
buried ground rod or alternative earth
ground system).
Check the DC volt-
age and current rating
(+13.8 V, 23 A) of the power
supply before connecting to the
transceiver.
Page 11FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
CONNECTION OF MICROPHONE AND HEADPHONE
Page 12 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
KEY, KEYER, AND COMPUTER-DRIVEN KEYING INTERCONNECTIONS
The
FT
DX
1200
includes many features for the CW operator. These functions will be detailed in the “2peration” section
later. Besides the built-in (lectronic .eyer, two key jacks are provided, one on the front and one on the rear panel, for
convenient connection to keying devices.
The 0enu selections allow you to con¿gure the front and rear panel
KEY
jacks according to the device you wish to con-
nect. For example, you may connect your keyer paddle to the front panel
KEY
jack, and use 0enu item “
018 F KEYER
TYPE
” for paddle input, and also connect the keying line from your personal computer which emulates a “straight key”)
to the rear panel
KEY
jack, and con¿gure the rear panel jack using 0enu item “
020 R KEYER TYPE
”.
Both
KEY
jacks on the
FT
DX
1200
utili]e “3ositive” keying voltage. .ey-up voltage is approximately 3.3V 'C, and
key-down current is approximately 4 m$. When connecting a key or other device to the
KEY
jacks, use only a 3-con-
tact “stereo”) 14” phone plug a -contact plug will place a short between the ring and grounded) shaft of the plug,
resulting in a constant “key-down” condition in some circumstances.
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
Page 13FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
VL-1000 LINEAR AMPLIFIER INTERCONNECTIONS
Be sure that both the
FT
DX
1200
and
VL-1000
are turned off, and then follow the installation recommendations con-
tained in the illustration.
NOTE:
5efer to the
VL-1000
2perating 0anual for details regarding ampli¿er operation.
'o not attempt to connect or disconnect coaxial cables when your hands are wet.
To link the FT
DX
1200 and VL-1000 Power
switches, set the VL-1000 REMOTE switch
to the “ON” position.
Set the front panel’s
INPUT switch to the
“INPUT2”.
Page 14 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
INTERFACING TO OTHER LINEAR AMPLIFIERS
NOTE
The T; G1' 2UT pin pin ) of the
LINEAR
jack
is a transistor “open collector” circuit. It is capable of
handling positive relay coil voltages up to 30 V'C
at 00 m$. If you plan to use multiple linear ampli-
¿ers for different bands, you must provide external
band switching of the “Linear Tx” relay control line
from the “T; G1' 2UT” line at the
LINEAR
jack.
The speci¿ed range for $LC voltage to be used with
the
FT
DX
1200
is 0 to -4 Volts 'C.
$mpli¿er systems utili]ing different $LC voltages
will not work correctly with the
FT
DX
1200
, and
their $LC lines must not be connected if this is the
case.
IMPORTANT NOTE!
'o not exceed the maximum voltage or current rat-
ings for the “T; G1' 2UT” pin pin ) of the
LIN-
EAR
jack. This line is not compatible with negative
'C voltages, or $C voltages of any magnitude.
0ost amplifier control relay systems reTuire only
low 'C voltagecurrent switching capability typi-
cally, 1V 'C at  a 7 m$), and the switching
transistor in the
FT
DX
1200
will easily accommodate
such ampli¿ers.
Note
When the
FC-40
is connected to the
FT
DX
1200
,
T; G1' pin ) of the
TUNER
jack and the
LINEAR
jack pin ) are common circuits.
Therefore, the maximum voltage at T; G1' pin
) of the
LINEAR
jack must not exceed V.
GND
EXT ALC
TX GND
Page 15FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
PLUG/CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS
Page 16 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
[
POWER
]
Switch
3ress and hold in this switch for one second to turn
the transceiver on. Similarly, press and hold in this
switch for one second to turn the transceiver off.
[
TUNE
]
Switch
This is the onoff switch for the
FT
DX
1200
s $uto-
matic $ntenna Tuner.
3ressing this button momentarily places the antenna
tuner in line between the transmitter ¿nal ampli¿er
and the antenna jack The “
TUNER
” icon will ap-
pear in the display). 5eception is not affected.
3ressing and holding in this button for two seconds,
while receiving in an amateur band, activates the
transmitter for a few seconds while the automatic
antenna tuner rematches the antenna system imped-
ance for minimum SW5. The resulting setting is au-
tomatically stored in one of the antenna tuner’s 100
memories for instant automatic recall later when the
receiver is tuned near the same freTuency.
3ressing this button momentarily, while the Tuner is
engaged, will take the $utomatic $ntenna tuner out
of the transmit line.
NOTE:
When the $utomatic $ntenna Tuner is tuning itself,
a signal is being transmitted. Therefore, be certain
that an antenna or dummy load is connected to the
selected antenna jack before pressing and holding in
the
[
TUNE
]
switch to start antenna tuning.
KEY Jack
This 14-inch, 3-contact jack accepts a CW key or
keyer paddles for the built-in electronic keyer),
or output from an external electronic keyer. 3inout
is shown on page 1. .ey up voltage is 3.3 V
'C, and key down current is 4 m$. This jack may
be con¿gured for keyer, “Bug”, “straight key”, or
computer keying interface operation via 0enu item
“
019 F CW KEYER
” see page 113). There is anoth-
er jack with the same name on the rear panel, and it
may be con¿gured independently for Internal .eyer
or pseudo-straight-key operation.
N
OTE:
You cannot use a -contact plug in this jack to do so
produces a constant “key down” condition).
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
Page 17FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
PHONES Jack
$ 14-inch, 3-contact jack accepts either monaural or
stereo headphones with - or 3-contact plugs. When
a plug is inserted, the loudspeaker is disabled.
N
OTE:
When wearing headphones, we recommend that you
turn the $F Gain levels down to their lowest settings
before turning power on, to minimi]e the impact on
your hearing caused by audio “pops” during switch-
on.
MIC Jack
This 8-pin jack accepts input from a microphone uti-
li]ing a traditional Y$(SU HF transceiver pinout.
[
ANT
]
Switch
3ressing this switch selects the
ANT 1
or the
ANT
2
connector on the rear panel, and allows convenient
antenna switching at the press of a button. The se-
lected antenna jack is indicated on the .ey Function
'isplay shown in the TFT 'isplay.
A
DVICE:
The $1T jack may be enabled to use as a receive
only antenna, using the 0enu item “
033 ANT2 SET-
TING
”. See page 114.
[
IPO
]
(
INTERCEPT POINT OPTIMIZATION
)
Switch
This button may be used to set the optimum front
end characteristics of the receiver circuit for a very
strong signal environment. $vailable selections are
$03 1 low distortion amplifier), $03 -stage
low-distortion 5F amplifier), or I32 bypasses the
front end 5F amplifier). The selected receiver 5F
amplifier appears in the I32 column of the .ey
Function 'isplay on the display.
[
ATT
]
Switch
This button selects the degree of attenuation, if any,
to be applied to the receiver input.
$vailable selections are ±6 dB, ±1 dB, ±18 dB, or
2FF. The attenuation level appears in the $TT col-
umn of the .ey Function 'isplay on the display.
A
DVICE:
The $ttenuator may be used in conjunction with the
[
IPO
]
button to provide additional signal reduction
when an extremely strong signal is being received.
[
R.FLT
]
(
ROOFING FILTER
)
Switch
This button selects the bandwidth of the receiver ¿rst
IF 5oo¿ng Filter. $vailable selections are 3 kH], 6
kH], 1 kH], or $uto.
The selected bandwidth appears in the 5.FLT column
of the .ey Function 'isplay on the TFT display.
A
DVICE:
The “$UT2” selection mode selects the optimum
bandwidth of the 5oo¿ng ¿lter for the reception
mode. In this case, the selected bandwidth in
the 5.FLT column of the .ey Function 'isplay
glows green The unselected choices glow Blue).
Because the roofing filter is in the first IF, the
protection it provides against interference is Tuite
significant. When set to $UT2, the SSB band-
width is 6 kH], CW, 5TTY and '$T$, the band-
width is 3 kH], while $0 and F0 is 1 kH].
[
NB
]
Switch
This button turns the IF 1oise Blanker on and off.
3ress this button momentarily to reduce short-dura-
tion pulse noise.
$vailable selections are 21, 2FF, or 1BW 21. The
attenuation level appears in the 1B column of the
.ey Function 'isplay on the display.
[
AGC
]
Switch
This button selects the $GC characteristics for the
receiver. $vailable selections are F$ST, 0I', SL2W
and 2FF, or $UT2. The selected $GC characteris-
tic appears in the $GC column of the .ey Function
'isplay on the TFT display.
3ress the
[
AGC
]
button repeatedly to select the de-
sired receiver-recovery time constant. 3ress and hold
in the
[
AGC
]
button for one second to disable the
$GC for testing or weak-signal reception).
A
DVICE:
The “$UT2” selection mode selects the charac-
teristic of the $GC for the reception mode. The
selected $GC characteristic will glow green in
the $GC column of the .ey Function 'isplay,
unselected characteristics glow Blue).
The $ttenuator may be used in conjunction with
the
[
IPO
]
button to provide two stages of signal
reduction when an extremely strong signal is be-
ing received.
If the $GC receiver-recovery time is set to “2ff”
by pressing and holding in the
[
AGC
]
button, the
S-meter will no longer deÀect. $dditionally, you
will likely encounter distortion on stronger sig-
nals, as the IF ampli¿ers and the following stages
are probably being overloaded.
[
MOX
]
Switch
3ressing this button engages the 3TT 3ush to Talk)
circuit to activate the transmitter the icon in the
L(' indicators area illuminates and the “
MOX
” icon
will appear in the TFT display). It must be turned off
the icons will disappear) for reception. This button
replicates the action of the 3ush to Talk 3TT) switch
on the microphone. When engaging the
[
MOX
]
but-
ton, or otherwise causing a transmission to be start-
ed, be certain you have either an antenna or 0-2hm
dummy load connected to the selected $ntenna jack.
Page 18 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
[
MIC/SPEED
]
Knob
MIC
This knob adjusts the microphone input level for
non-processed) SSB transmission.
The display will show the relative microphone gain
level for 3 seconds whenever this knob is turned.
A
DVICE:
$djust the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob while speaking in a
somewhat louder than normal voice level, watch the
$LC level and adjust the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob so
that the $LC level indication just reaches the right
edge of the $LC scale. Then, when you speak in
your normal voice level, you will not be over-driving
the microphone ampli¿er stages.
SPEED
This knob adjusts the keying speed of the internal
CW keyer 4 a 60 W30). Clockwise rotation in-
creases the sending speed.
The display will show the keying speed for 3 sec-
onds whenever this knob is turned.
[
PROC/CAR
]
Knob
PROC
This knob adjusts the compression input) level
of the transmitter 5F speech processor in the SSB
mode.
CAR
This knob adjusts the 5F 3ower Carrier) output of
the transceiver. For the SSB mode, set the desired
maximum 5F 3ower output via 0enu item “
177 TX
MAX POWER
” see page 64).
I
MPORTANT NOTE:
The setting value of 0enu item “
177 TX MAX
POWER
” is applied to all emission modes.
For example When 0enu item “
177 TX MAX
POWER
” is set to “
50
”, the maximum 5F 3ower
output for all emission modes is “
50
”, even if the
[
PROC/CAR
]
knob is set to the fully clockwise po-
sition.
A
DVICE:
The 5F 3ower output setting will be shown for 3
seconds in the right of the TFT display whenever the
outer
[
PROC/CAR
]
knob is turned, except when
0enu item “
177 TX MAX POWER
” is set to watts.
In the SSB mode the
[
PROC
]
value will be shown
instead of the 5F 3ower output.
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
Page 19FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[
NOTCH
]
Switch
3ressing this button allows you to adjust the center
freTuency of the IF 1otch ¿lter using the
[
NOTCH
]
knob. While activated, the “
NOTCH
” indicator in
the 'S3 display illuminates. 3ress the
[
NOTCH
]
switch brieÀy to toggle the IF 1otch ¿lter onoff.
[
NOTCH
]
Knob
3ress the
[
NOTCH
]
switch to turn the IF 12TCH
¿lter on or off. 5otate the inner
[
NOTCH
]
knob to
adjust the center freTuency of the IF 12TCH ¿lter.
The null position of the IF 12TCH filter can be
observed on the display. Furthermore, the display
will show the center freTuency of the IF 12TCH
¿lter for 3 seconds whenever the
[
NOTCH
]
knob is
turned.
[
CONT/APF
]
Knob
CONT
In the SSB, $0, and F0 modes, press the
[
CONT/
APF
]
switch then turn the outer
[
CONT/APF
]
knob
to select the desired C21T2U5 ¿lter response. The
C21T2U5 ¿lter is engaged via the
[
CONT/APF
]
switch.
APF
In the CW mode, press the
[
CONT/APF
]
switch and
then turn the outer
[
CONT/APF
]
knob to select the
desired $3F $udio 3eak Filter) response. The $3F
is engaged via the
[
CONT/APF
]
switch.
[
CONT/APF
]
Switch
3ressing this button allows you to select the 'S3
Contour filter response using the
[
CONT/APF
]
knob. While activated, the “
CONTOUR
” indicator
in the 'S3 display illuminates. 3ress the
[
CONT/
APF
]
knob brieÀy to toggle the IF Contour ¿lter on
off.
In the CW mode, pressing this button will activate
the $3F $udio 3eak Filter) which provides a very
narrow audio bandwidth. While activated, the “
APF
”
indicator in the 'S3 display illuminates.
[
SHIFT
]
Knob
(
EXCEPT ON AM AND FM MODE
)
5otate the inner
[
SHIFT
]
to move the passband of
the IF 'S3 filter by 0 H] steps. The total adjust-
ment range is 1 kH]. The position of the passband
can be observed on the display. Furthermore, the
display will show the shift value of the IF SHIFT for
3 seconds whenever the
[
SHIFT
]
knob is turned.
[
WIDTH
]
Knob
(
EXCEPT ON AM AND FM MODE
)
5otate the outer
[
WIDTH
]
knob to set the overall
bandwidth of the IF 'S3 filter. Counter-clockwise
rotation reduces the bandwidth, while clockwise
rotation increases the bandwidth. The current band-
width can be observed on the display. Furthermore,
the TFT display will show the bandwidth of the IF
passband for 3 seconds whenever the
[
WIDTH
]
knob
is turned.
[
BK-IN
]
Switch
This button turns the CW break-in capability on and
off. While CW break-in is activated, the “
BK-IN
”
icon appears in the TFT display.
[
AF
]
Knob
The inner
[
AF
]
knob sets the receiver audio volume
level. Typically, you will operate with this control set
between the o’clock and 10 o’clock positions.
[
RF/SQL
]
Knob
ADVICE:
This control may be selected between the “SQL” and
“5F G$I1” functions via the 0enu Item “
038 RF
SQL VR
”.
RF
The outer
[
RF/SQL
]
knob is the receiver 5F gain
control, which adjusts the gain of the receiver 5F
and IF ampli¿er stages. This control is normally left
in the fully clockwise position.
SQL
This knob sets the signal level threshold, below
which the receiver audio is muted, in all modes. It
is very useful during local rag-chews, to eliminate
noise between incoming transmissions. This control
is normally kept fully counter-clockwise off), ex-
cept when scanning and during F0 operation.
[
MONI
]
(
Monitor
)
Switch
This button enables the transmit monitor in all
modes. While activated, the “
MONI
” icon appears in
the TFT display.
A
DVICE:
When using headphones, the 0onitor function is
very helpful while adjusting the 3arametric (Tual-
i]er or other voice Tuality adjustments. The voice
heard in the headphones represents the transmitted
audio Tualities.
Page 20 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
[
SCOPE
]
Switch
3ress this button momentarily to switch between the
0enu, the Scope, the Full TFT screen Scope, the
Scope $F-FFT when the optional FFT unit is in-
stalled), and the Scope 0emory when there is mem-
ory) screens. When the optional FFT unit is installed,
press and hold this button for more than one second
to operate the decode function when operating CW,
5TTY, 3S.).
[
AUTO
]
Switch
This button is used to select the scope mode $UT2
or 0$1U$L)
[
MENU
]
Switch
This button is used to access the 0enu system. The
various transceiver characteristics may be config-
ured. 0enu operation is described in detail, in this
manual.
I
MPORTANT NOTE:
3ressing the
[
MENU
]
button will activate the 0enu,
and the 0enu items will appear on the display. 2nce
you have changed the parameters, you must press the
[
MENU
]
button to save any con¿guration changes.
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[
SELECT
]
Switch
This button is used to select the 0enu system.
[
WSTX
]
Switch
These buttons permit selection of the 0enu items
and settings.
Page 21FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[
A
X
B
]
Switch
3ress this button momentarily to transfer the fre-
Tuency or memory channel data, from VF2-$ to
VF2-B, overwriting any previous contents in VF2-
B. Use this key to set both VF2-$ and VF2-B to the
same freTuency and mode.
[
A
X
W
B
]
Switch
3ressing this button momentarily, exchanges the
freTuency or memory channel data, of VF2-$ and
VF2-B.
[
STO
] (Store)
Button
3ressing the
[
STO
]
button copies the contents fre-
Tuency, mode, bandwidth, F0 repeater offset, and
CTCSS settings) of VF2-$, into consecutive Q0B
0emories.
[
RCL
] (Recall)
Button
3ressing the
[
RCL
]
button, recalls one of up to ¿ve
Quick 0emory Bank memories for operation.
[
NAR
] (
Narrow
)
Switch
This button is used to set the 'S3 digital) IF ¿lters
to 1arrow bandwidth.
A
DVICE:
You may adjust the bandwidth using the
[
WIDTH
]
knob.
In the AM mode, this button is used to toggle the re-
ceiver bandwidth between wide  kH]) and narrow
6 kH]).
In the FM mode on the 8 0H] and 0 0H] bands,
this button is used to toggle the F0 deviationband-
width between wide .0 kH] 'ev..0 kH] BW)
and narrow . kH] 'ev.1. kH] BW).
[
TXW
] (
TX Watch
)
Switch
3ressing and holding this button lets you monitor the
transmit freTuency when split freTuency operation is
engaged. 5elease the button to return to normal split
freTuency operation.
[
C.S
]
Switch
3ress this button momentarily to directly recall a fa-
vorite 0enu Selection.
To program a 0enu selection to the
[
C.S
]
button,
press the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu. Select
the 0enu item you want to set as the short cut. 3ress
the
[
C.S
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button this
will lock in the selected 0enu item as the short cut.
Page 22 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
[
SPLIT
]
Switch
3ress this button to operate split freTuency between
VF2-$ used for reception) and VF2-B used for
transmission). If you press and hold in the
[
SPLIT
]
button for one second, the “Quick Split” feature will
be engaged. VF2-B transmit will automatically be
set to a freTuency kH] higher than the VF2-$ re-
ceive freTuency, with the same operating mode. The
transceiver will operate in the Split mode.
[
V/M
]
Switch
This button toggles freTuency control between VF2-
$ and the memory system. In memory mode, “
MEM
”
0emory Channel) will be shown in the display to
indicate the current selection. 3ressing the
[
V/M
]
button displays the original memory freTuency, and
the “
MEM
” will be displayed. 3ressing it once more
returns freTuency operation to VF2-$, and the icon
will no longer be displayed.
[
M
X
A
]
Switch
3ressing this button momentarily, will display the
contents of the currently-selected memory channel
for 10 seconds.
Holding
[
M
X
A
]
button in for one second copies the
data from the selected memory to VF2-$, and two
beeps sound. 3revious data in VF2-$ will be over-
written.
[
A
X
M
]
Switch
3ressing this button momentarily, displays the con-
tents of the currently-selected memory channel for
10 seconds.
3ressing and holding in this key for one second until
the double beep) copies the current operating data
into the currently selected memory channel, over-
writing any previous data stored there.
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
Page 23FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[
MODE
]
Switch
This button selects the operating mode. The selec-
tions available are
LSB
Æ
CW USB)
Æ
5TTY LSB)
Æ
Æ
'$T$ LSB)
Æ
$0
Æ
LSB
Æ
5epeated presses of this button steps through the
available selections.
3ressing and holding this button will toggle to the
alternate mode. In the $0 mode, a long press will
toggle between the $0 and F0 mode.
For example, In the LSB or USB modes, a long
press of this button toggles between “LSB” and
“USB” mode.
[
FAST
]
Switch
3ressing this button will change the tuning of the
0ain Tuning 'ial knob VF2-$) to a higher step
rate.
When this function is activated, the “
FAST
” indica-
tor in the L(' indicators area illuminates.
[
LOCK
]
Switch
This button toggles locking onoff for the 0ain Tun-
ing 'ial knob VF2-$). With “Lock” on, the 0ain
Tuning 'ial knob can still be turned, but the fre-
Tuency will not change, and the “
LOCK
” indicator
in the L(' indicators area illuminates.
Main Tuning Dial Knob
This large knob adjusts the operating freTuency of
VF2-$. Clockwise rotation of this knob increases
the freTuency. 'efault tuning increments are 10 H]
CW, SSB), 0 H] 5TTY'$T$), 100 H] $0
F0). When the
[
FAST
]
button is pressed, the tuning
steps increases. The available steps are
OPERATING MODE
LSB/USB/CW
AM/FM
RTTY/DATA
1 STEP
10 Hz
(
100 Hz
)
100 Hz
(
1 kHz
)
5 Hz
(
100 Hz
)
1 DIAL ROTATION
10 kHz
(
100 kHz
)
100 kHz
(
1 MHz
)
5 kHz (100 kHz)
Numbers in parentheses indicate steps when the
[
FAST
]
button is On.
ADVICE:
The tuning steps for the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob
are set, at the factory, to 10 H] SSB, CW), 0 H]
5TTY'$T$) and 100 H] $0F0) per step. Via
0enu item “
151 CW DIAL STEP
” to “
155 SSB
DIAL STEP
”, however, you may change these settings
to 1 or H] SSB, CW), 1 or 10 H] 5TTY, '$T$),
and 10 H] $0, F0) instead.
Page 24 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[
BAND
]
Keys
These keys allow one-touch selection of the desired
$mateur band 1.8 a 0 0H]).
The keys may also be used for direct entry of a de-
sired operating freTuency during VF2 operation.
[
RX CLAR
]
Switch
3ressing this button activates the 5; Clari¿er. This
will allow you to temporarily adjust the receive fre-
Tuency up to . kH] with the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob. 3ress this button once more to return the re-
ceiver to the original freTuency the Clari¿er offset
will be remembered, in case you want to use it again.
To cancel the Clarifier offset, press the
[
CLEAR
]
button.
3ressing this switch during Split operation will
change the tuning rate of the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob
VF2-B) to 100 H]step.
When this function is activated, the “
FAST
” indica-
tor in the L(' indicators area illuminates.
[
TX CLAR
]
Switch
3ressing this button activates the T; Clari¿er, to al-
low offsetting the transmit freTuency temporarily.
3ress this button once more to return the transmit-
ter to the original freTuency the Clarifier offset
will be remembered, though, in case you want to
use it again. To cancel the Clari¿er offset, press the
[
CLEAR
]
button.
[
CLEAR
]
Switch
3ressing this button clears out any freTuency offset
you have programmed into the Clarifier register
thereby setting the offset to “Zero”).
3ressing this switch during Split operation toggles
locking onoff for the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob VF2-
B). With “Lock” on, the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob can
still be turned, but the freTuency will not change, and
the “
LOCK
” indicator in the L(' indicators area il-
luminates.
Page 25FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[
MHz/μT
]
Switch
3ressing this button allows you to tune the VF2 fre-
Tuency down or up in 1 0H] increments, using the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob.
3ressing and holding this switch for one second al-
lows you to adjust the center freTuency of the 5F
-Tuning ¿lter passband using the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob, when the optional 5F -Tuning .it is con-
nected. While activated, “
μ-Tune
” appears in the
display. 3ress and hold in the
[
MHz/μT
]
switch for
one second to toggle the -Tuning function onoff.
When -Tuning .it is not connected, press and hold
the
[
MHz/μT
]
switch for one second “
RX IN
” ap-
pear in the display), you can receive by connecting
the 5; antenna to the “
μ-Tune FROM
” jack on the
rear panel.
[
MCH/GRP
]
Switch
MCH
3ressing this button allows you to select a memory
channel using the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob.
GRP
3ressing this button allows you to select a memory
group by turning the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
'uring the VF2-$ operation, this knob tunes the
Clari¿er offset freTuency up to . kH].
'uring Split operation, this knob adjusts the operat-
ing freTuency of VF2-B.
21
9
TFT Display
Mode Indicator
'isplays the current operating mode.
3ress and hold the
[
MODE
]
button in the individual
operating modes for approximately one second to
switch between modes as follows
LSB
Ù
USB
CW LSB)
Ù
CW USB)
5TTY LSB)
Ù
5TTY USB)
'$T$ LSB)
Ù
'$T$ USB)
$0
Ù
F0
VFO-A Frequency Display
Shows the main band VF2-$) freTuency.
Page 26 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ,QGLFDWRU
TUNER
This indicator appears when the internal $utomatic
$ntenna Tuner is activated.
VOX
This indicator appears when the automatic voice-
actuated transmitter switches in the SSB, $0, and
F0 modes.
PROC
This indicator appears whenever the 'S3 Speech
3rocessor is activated.
MIC EQ
This indicator appears whenever the Three-Band
3arametric 0icrophone (Tuali]er is activated via
the 0enu.
NAR
This indicator appears whenever the receiver’s
narrow IF 'S3 ¿lter is engaged.
REC
This indicator appears while the optional Voice
0emory Unit is recording your voice message, or
the Contest .eyer is recording your CW keying.
PLAY
This indicator appears while the optional Voice
0emory Unit is playing back the recorded voice
message, or the recorded Contest CW keying.
[
+
]
/
[
-
]
'uring F0 repeater operation, a negative freTuen-
cy shift will be indicated by “[-]” while a positive
freTuency shift will be indicated by “[]”.
DNR
This indicator appears whenever the 'igital 1oise
5eduction feature is activated.
DNF
This indicator appears whenever the 'igital 1otch
Filter is activated.
VFO-B Frequency Display
Shows the sub band VF2-B) freTuency during Split
operation.
ADVICE:
When turning the
[
CLAR
]
,
[
MIC/SPEED
]
,
[
PROC/CAR
]
,
[
NOTCH
]
,
[
CONT/APF
]
,
[
SHIFT
]
, or
[
WIDTH
]
knob, each freTuency or
value will appear in this area for 3 seconds.
DISPLAY INDICATIONS
Tuning Offset Indicator
This indicates the relative offset of the CW-TU1(,
ȝ-TU1(, Clari¿er, etc.
S/PO Meter
2n reception, this indicates the received signal
strength from S-0 to S-60dB.
2n transmission, this indicates the 5F 3ower 2utput,
from 0 to 10 Watts.
ADVICE:
The S32 meter types can be changed to
$1$L2G or B$5 type via the menu item “
012
METER TYPE SELECT
”.
The S32 meters can be set to the 3eak-hold
function B$5 type only) via the menu item “
013
BAR MTR PEAK HOLD
”.
DSP Display
This indicator is used for viewing the status of the
'S3 C21T2U5, 12TCH, WI'TH and SHIFT).
Key Function Display
ANT
(
1, 2
)
:
Indicates which antenna is selected by the front
panel
[
ANT
]
button.
IPO
(
AMP1, AMP2, IPO
)
:
Indicates which front end 5F ampli¿er is selected
by the front panel
[
IPO
]
button.
ATT
(
OFF, –6 dB, –12 dB, –18 dB
)
:
Indicates the attenuation level, selected by the
front panel
[
ATT
]
button.
R.FLT
(
3 kHz, 6 kHz, 15 kHz
)
:
Indicates the receiver IF 5oo¿ng Filter that is se-
lected by the front panel
[
R.FLT
]
button.
NB
(
OFF, ON, ON
[
NBW
]
)
:
Indicates the receiver’s “short-duration” 1oise
Blanker setting, which is selected by the front
panel
[
NB
]
button.
AGC
(
SLOW, FAST, MID
)
:
Indicates the $GC decay time setting, which is se-
lected by the front panel
[
AGC
]
switch.
Page 27FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
DISPLAY INDICATIONS
Clock
Indicates the current time.
To set the clock
1. 3ress and hold the
[
C.S
]
button until the clock
digits blink.
. (nter the present time via the number keys
[
BAND
]
keys).
3. 3ress the
[
ENT
]
button.
Multi-Function Display
This area usually displays the status of major func-
tions.
3ress the
[
S
T
W
X
]
buttons to select an indicator
for the desired function, then press the
[
SELECT
]
button to select either of the settings.
A
DVICE:
This area also shows the CW5TTY'$T$ texts,
SC23( level meters, memory channels, and
menu items.
VOX:
This is the 21 or 2FF indicator for the automatic
voice-actuated transmitter switching in the SSB,
$0, and F0 modes. The controls affecting V2;
operation are the 0enu items “
181 VOX GAIN
”,
“
182 VOX DELAY
”, and “
183 ANTI VOX GAIN
”.
By proper adjustment of these controls, hands-free
voice-actuated operation is possible.
METER:
This indicator determines the function of the meter
during transmission.
PO
Indicates the 5F 3ower 2utput, from 0
to 10 Watts on transmit.
ALC
Indicates the relative $LC voltage.
SWR
Indicates the Standing Wave 5atio
Forward 5eÀected).
COMP
Indicates the speech compressor level
SSB mode only).
ID
Indicates the ¿nal ampli¿er drain cur-
rent.
VDD
Indicates the ¿nal ampli¿er drain volt-
age.
PROC
(
Processor):
This indicator enables the Speech 3rocessor for
SSB transmission. $djustment of the 3rocessor
level is accomplished via the
[
PROC/CAR
]
knob.
A
DVICE:
The Speech 3rocessor is a tool for increasing
the average power output through a compres-
sion techniTue. However, if the 3rocessor level
is advanced too far, the increase in compression
becomes counter-productive, as intelligibility
will suffer. We recommend that you monitor
the sound of your signal using the 0onitor with
headphones).
DNR:
This indicator turns the 0ain band VF2-$) re-
ceiver’s 'igital 1oise 5eduction circuit on and off.
$djustment of the 1oise 5eduction level is accom-
plished via the 0enu item “
110 DNR LEVEL
”.
MIC EQ:
This indicator enables the Three-Band-3arametric
0icrophone (Tuali]er. The (Tuali]er settings are
activated via the 0enu.
DNF:
This indicator turns the 0ain band VF2-$) re-
ceiver’s 'igital 1otch Filter on and off. This is an
automatic circuit, and there is no adjustment knob
for the '1F.
KEYER:
This indicator toggles the internal CW keyer on
and off. The .eyer sending speed is adjusted via
the front panel’s
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob and the CW
Hang Time is adjusted via the 0enu item “
064
CW BK-IN DELAY
”.
ZIN/SPOT:
This indicator enables the CW receiver spotting
tone. By matching the S32T tone to that of the in-
coming CW signal precisely the same pitch), you
will be “]ero beating” your transmitted signal with
the freTuency of the other station.
Page 28 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
DISPLAY INDICATIONS
RX Indicator
This indicator illuminates when the sTuelch opens.
TX Indicator
This indicator illuminates during transmission.
Memory Mode RX/TX Indicators
Green (Left):
This indicator illuminates when the receiver is ac-
tive on the memory channel.
Red (Right):
This indicator illuminates when the transmitter is
active on the memory channel.
Main Band RX/TX Indicators
Green (Left):
This indicator illuminates when the receiver is ac-
tive on the main band VF2-$).
Red (Right):
This indicator illuminates when the transmitter is
active on the main band VF2-$).
Sub Band RX/TX Indicators
Green (Left):
This indicator illuminates when the receiver is ac-
tive on the main band VF2-B).
Red (Right):
This indicator illuminates when the transmitter is
active on the main band VF2-B).
LED Indicators
Main Tuning Dial FAST/LOCK
Indicators
FAST:
This indicator appears when the 0ain Tuning 'ial
knob tuning rate is set to “fast”.
LOCK:
This indicator appears when the 0ain Tuning 'ial
knob is locked.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob FAST/LOCK
Indicators
FAST:
This indicator appears when the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob tuning rate is set to “fast”.
LOCK:
This indicator appears when the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob is locked.
Page 29FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
REAR PANEL
ANT 1/2 Jacks
Connect your main antennas) here, using type-0
3L-) connectors and coaxial feed lines. The in-
ternal antenna tuner affects only the antennas) con-
nected here, and only during transmission.
Warning!
7KH95)YROWDJH#:ȍLVDSSOLHGWR
the TX RF section of the transceiver while trans-
mitting. Do not touch the TX RF section while
transmitting.
DC IN Jack
This is the 'C power supply connection for the
transceiver. Use the supplied 'C cable to connect di-
rectly to a 'C power supply, which must be capable
of supplying at least 3 $ #13.8 V'C.
GND
Use this terminal to connect the transceiver to a good
earth ground, for safety and optimum performance.
Use a large diameter, short braided cable for making
ground connections, and please refer to page for
other notes about proper grounding.
To prevent damage from lightning, atmo-
spheric electricity, electrical shock, etc., be
certain to provide a good earth ground.
μ-TUNE Jacks
These jacks are used to connect the optional 5F
Tuning .it, signal in and signal out.
ROT Jack
This covered 6-pin 0I1I-'I1 -ack accepts a cable
to connect to a Y$(SU
G-800DXA
-1000DXA/
-2800DXA
$ntenna 5otator listed models are cur-
rent as of early 013). You may control the antenna
a]imuth rotation and rotation speed) using the Func-
tion buttons on the front panel.
LINEAR Jack
This 10-pin output jack provides band selection data,
which may be used for control of optional accesso-
ries such as the
VL-1000
Solid-state Linear $mpli-
¿er.
TUNER Jack
This 8-pin output jack is used for connection to the
FC-40
(xternal $utomatic $ntenna Tuner.
RTTY/DATA Jack
This 6-pin inputoutput jack accepts $FS. input
from a Terminal 1ode Controller T1C) or an op-
tional interface unit it also provides ¿xed level 100-
mV #600 2hms) receiver audio output, and FS.
keying line.
PTT Jack
This 5C$ input jack may be used to provide manual
transmitter activation using a footswitch or other
switching device. Its function is identical to the
[
MOX
]
button on the front panel. The same line is
available at the
RTTY/PKT
jack for T1C control.
2pen-circuit voltage is  V'C, and closed-circuit
current is m$.
Page 30 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
REAR PANEL
REC Jack
This 3.-mm, 3-contact jack provides low-level
receiver audio output for recording. It also outputs
voice audio during transmission if the “
MONI
” is
turned on.
3eak signal level is 300 mVp-p at 10 k-2hms. The
front panel [
AF
] knobs do not affect the signals at
this jack.
REM
(
REMOTE
)
Jack
By plugging the optional
FH-2
5emote Control
.eypad into this gold-plated jack, direct access to
the
FT
DX
1200
C3U is provided for control functions
such as contest memory keying, plus freTuency and
function control.
EXT SPKR Jack
This 3.-mm, -contact, gold-plated jack provides
variable audio output for an external loudspeaker.
The audio output impedance at this jack is 4 - 8
2hms, and the level varies according to the setting of
the front panel
[
AF
]
knob. Inserting a plug into this
jack disables the internal loudspeaker.
KEY Jack
This 14-inch 3-contact jack accepts a CW key or key-
er paddle. $ two-contact plug cannot be used in this
jack. .ey-up voltage is 3.3 V 'C, and key-down cur-
rent is 4 m$. This jack may be con¿gured for keyer,
“Bug”, “straight key”, or computer keying interface
operation via 0enu item “
020 R KEYER TYPE
”.
μ-TUNE Jack
This covered 10-pin mini-'I1 jack is used for con-
trol of the optional 5F Tuning .it.
CAT Jack
This -pin serial 'B- jack allows external computer
control of the
FT
DX
1200
. Connect a serial cable
here and to the 5S-3C C20 port on your personal
computer no external interface is reTuired).
Page 31FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
OPTIONAL FH-2 SWITCHES
The optional 5emote Control .eypad
FH-2
can be used to control the optional 'VS-6 Voice 0emory capability for the
SSB$0F0 modes the contest memory keyer for the CW mode and the text memory for the 5TTY'$T$ modes.
Some speci¿c capabilities of the
FH-2
are
2n SSB$0F0 modes, ¿ve channels of storage and playback of voice memory 0 seconds each), using your own
voice for recording see page 71).
2n CW mode, the
FH-2
provides storage and recall of CW messages for repetitive CQ and contest automatic number
transmissions see page 8).
2n 5TTY'$T$ mode, the
FH-2
provides storage and recall of T(;T messages for repetitive CQ transmissions see
pages 104, 106).
[
1
]
,
[
2
]
,
[
3
]
,
[
4
]
,
[
5
]
Switches
These buttons work as the Voice 0emory and CW
0essage 0emory Selection .ey.
In the case of Voice 0emory, up to 0 seconds of
audio may be stored on each channel.
For CW 0essages and CW Text 0essages, up to 0
characters 3$5IS specification) may be stored
into each channel.
[
W
]
,
[
X
]
,
[
S
]
,
[
T
]
Switches
Usually, these buttons are used for tuning the VF2
freTuency. 3ress the [
S
][
T
] buttons to change the
freTuency in the same increments as the microphone
[
UP
][
DWN
] switches. 3ress the [
W
][
X
] buttons to
change the freTuency by 100 kH] steps.
When programming the Contest 0emory .eyer,
these buttons are used to move the cursor and select
the text characters.
[
P/B
]
Switch
This button can be used to insert a space into the
position where the cursor is blinking.
[
LOCK
]
Switch
This button may be used to lock out the
FH-2
key
buttons, to prevent accidental activation of
FH-2
operations.
[
MEM
]
Switch
3ress this button to store either a Voice 0emory, or a
Contest .eyer 0emory.
[
DEC
]
Switch
When utili]ing the seTuential contest number
capability of the Contest .eyer, press this button to
decrement decrease) the current Contest 1umber by
one digit i.e. to back up from 18 to 17, etc.).
Page 32 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
Before turning on the main power, please verify the following items once more.
Have you made all ground connections securely" See page for details.
'o you have your antennas) connected to the rear-panel $ntenna jacks)" See page 10 for details.
Is your microphone andor key or paddle) connected" See pages 11, 1 for details.
If using a linear ampli¿er, have all interconnections been successfully completed" See pages 13, 14 for details.
3lease rotate the
[
AF
]
control to the fully counter-clockwise position, to avoid a loud blast of audio when the trans-
ceiver turns on. See page 1 for details.
BASIC OPERATION:
RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
Page 33FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
momentary presses of the
[
14
]
0H] band button.
(ach $mateur band button may similarly have up
to three freTuencymode settings applied.
When the
[
MHz/μT
]
button located to the left of
the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob) is pressed, the “
MHz
”
notation will appear in the display, and then rota-
tion of the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob will change the
freTuency in 1 0H] steps.
6. 3ress the
[
ANT
]
button to select the ap-
propriate antenna for the band in use.
A
DVICE:
When you make an antenna selection,
that antenna is “remembered” by the
microprocessor in conjunction with the
VF2 register in use.
7. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
button to select the
desired operating mode.
5epeated presses of the
[
MODE
]
button step through the available se-
lections.
3ressing and holding the
[
MODE
]
button will toggle to the alternate
mode.
For example, In the LSB or USB modes, pressing
and holding the
[
MODE
]
button toggles between
“LSB” and “USB” mode.
A
DVICE:
By convention in the $mateur bands, LSB is
used on the 7 0H] and lower bands with the
exception of 60 meters), while USB is utili]ed on
the 14 0H] and higher bands.
When changing modes from SSB to CW, you
will observe a freTuency shift on the display.
This shift represents the BF2 offset between the
“]ero beat” freTuency and the audible CW pitch
tone) you can hear the pitch is programmed via
the 0enu item “
066 CW FREQ DISPLAY
”), even
1. Turn on the external 'C power supply.
. 3ress and hold in the front-panel
[
ON/OFF
]
switch
until the transceiver turns on. $fter
about five seconds ten seconds if the
optional -Tuning .it is connected), the
transceiver is ready for full operation.
3. The transceiver will start up on 7.000.000 0H]
LSB, or the previously used operating freTuency)
and normal operation may begin.
N
OTE:
To turn power off, press and hold in the front panel
[
ON/OFF
]
switch for one second.
4. 5otate the
[
AF
]
knob to set a com-
fortable audio level of the incoming
signals or noise. Clockwise rotation
of the
[
AF
]
knob increases the vol-
ume level.
N
OTE:
When using headphones, start by rotating the
[
AF
]
knob counter-clockwise, then bring the volume level
up after you put the headphones on. This will mini-
mi]e the chance of damage to your hearing caused
by an unexpectedly high audio level.
. 3ress an appropriate
[
BAND
]
key corresponding to
the $mateur band on which you wish to begin opera-
tion.
A
DVICE:
2ne-touch selection of each
$mateur band between 1.8
and 0 0H] is provided.
The
FT
DX
1200
utili]es a triple band-stack VF2
selection techniTue, which permits storing up to
three favorite freTuencies and modes onto each
VF2 band register. For example, you may store
one freTuency each on 14 0H] CW, 5TTY, and
USB, then recall these freTuencies by successive,
Here is the typical start-up procedure for normal operation
[
POWER
]
Switch
[
AF
]
Knob
Main Tuning Dial Knob
[
BAND
]
Keys
BASIC OPERATION:
RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
[
MODE
]
Button
[
ANT
]
Switch
Page 34 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
though the actual tone that you hear is not chang-
ing.
When operating on the F0 mode, rotate the
[
RF/
SQL
]
STuelch) knob clockwise to the point
where the background noise is just silenced. This
is the point of maximum sensitivity to weak sig-
nals. (xcessive advancement of the
[
RF/SQL
]
knob will decrease the ability of the receiver to
detect weak signals.
You may switch the
[
RF/SQL
]
knob from the 5F
Gain Function to the STuelch Function via 0enu
item “
038 RF
SQL VR
”.
8. 5otate the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob to tune around the
band, and begin normal operation.
ADVICE:
Clockwise rotation of the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob
increases the operating freTuency, one “step”
of the synthesi]er at a time similarly, counter-
clockwise rotation of the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob
will decrease the freTuency. Two settings, one
“normal” and one “fast”, are available for each
operating mode. 3ressing the
[
FAST
]
button
engages the “Fast” tuning selection see chart be-
low).
BASIC OPERATION:
RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
The tuning steps for the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob
are set, at the factory, to 10 H] SSB, CW, 5TTY,
'$T$) and 100 H] $0F0) per step. Via 0enu
items “
151 CW DIAL STEP
” to “
155 SSB DIAL
STEP
”, however, you may change these set-
tings from 10 H] to 1 or H] SSB, CW, 5TTY,
'$T$) and 100 H] to 10 H] $0, F0) instead.
MAIN TUNING DIAL KNOB TUNING RATE
OPERATING
MODE
1 STEP 1 DIAL ROTATION
LSB/USB/CW/
RTTY/DATA
1 / 5 / 10 Hz
(
100 Hz
)
1 / 5 / 10 kHz
(
100 kHz
)
AM/FM
100 Hz
(
1 kHz
)
100 kHz
(
1 MHz
)
Numbers in parentheses indicate steps when the
[
FAST
]
button is On.
If you want to effect rapid freTuency change,
there are several techniTues available
y
'irect keyboard entry of the freTuency.
y
Use the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to tune in 1
0H] steps.
y
Use the microphone’s
[
UP
]
[
DWN
]
scanning
keys, if your microphone is so eTuipped.
Page 35FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
OPERATION ON 60-METER
(
5 MHZ
)
B
AND
(
U.S.
AND U.K. VERSION ONLY
)
The recently-released 60-meter band is covered, in the
FT
DX
1200
, by ¿xed memory channels. These channels are set to
USB or CW, and they appear between the “last” 30S channel “
P9U
”) and the ¿rst “regular” memory channel Channel
1)
1. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button once to enter the “0emory”
mode the “
MEM
” icon will appear in the display.
. 3ress the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button located on the bot-
tom right of the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob. The “
MCH
”
notation and a memory channel number will appear
in the display to signify that rotation of the
[
VFO-
B/CLAR
]
knob will allow selection of the memory
channel.
3. 0emory channels “
5M-01
” through “
5M-10
”) are
pre-programmed, at the factory, with the permitted
freTuencies in the 0H] band, and the USB or CW
mode is automatically selected on these channels.
4. To exit from 60-meter operation and return to the
VF2 mode, just press the
[
V/M
]
button.
N
OTE:
The freTuencies and operating mode for 0H] band
operation are ¿xed, and may not be changed.
BASIC OPERATION:
RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MCH
]
Button
[
V/M
]
Button
Main Tuning Dial Knob
CHANNEL
NUMBER
5M-01
5M-02
5M-03
5M-04
5M-05
5M-06
5M-07
5M-08
5M-09
5M-10
U.S. VERSION
5.332000 MHz
5.348000 MHz
5.358500 MHz
5.373000 MHz
5.405000 MHz
5.332000 MHz
5.348000 MHz
5.358500 MHz
5.373000 MHz
5.405000 MHz
U.K. VERSION
5.260000 MHz
5.280000 MHz
5.290000 MHz
5.368000 MHz
5.373000 MHz
5.400000 MHz
5.405000 MHz
-
-
-
FREQUENCY
Page 36 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
BASIC OPERATION:
RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
CLAR
(
CLARIFIER
)
O
PERATION
The
[
RX CLAR
]
,
[
TX CLAR
]
,
[
CLEAR
]
buttons and
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob are used to offset the receive freTuency,
the transmit freTuency, or both, from their settings on the VF2-$ freTuency. Four small numbers on the TFT 'isplay
show the current Clari¿er offset. The Clari¿er controls on the
FT
DX
1200
are designed to allow you to preset an offset up
to . kH]) without actually retuning, and then to activate it via the Clari¿er
[
RX CLAR
]
and
[
TX CLAR
]
buttons.
This feature is ideal for following a drifting station, or for setting the small freTuency offsets sometimes utili]ed in ';
“Split” work.
Here is the techniTue for utili]ing the Clari¿er
1. 3ress the
[
RX CLAR
]
button. The “
RX
” notation
will appear in the TFT 'isplay, and the programmed
offset will be applied to the receive freTuency.
. 5otation of the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob will allow
you to modify your initial offset on the Ày. 2ffsets of
up to . kH] may be set using the Clari¿er.
To cancel Clari¿er operation, press the
[
RX CLAR
]
but-
ton. The “
RX
” notation will disappear from the display.
A
DVICE:
Turning the Clari¿er off merely cancels the applica-
tion of the programmed offset from the receive and
or the transmit freTuencies. To clear the Clarifier
offset, and reset it to “]ero,” press the
[
CLEAR
]
but-
ton. The programmed offset is displayed in the small
multi-channel window of the freTuency display.
The Clari¿er operation including the offset freTuen-
cy) will be memori]ed independently on each VF2
stack of VF2-$ and VF2-B.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
RX CLAR
]
Button
[
TX CLAR
]
Button
[
CLEAR
]
Button
TXCLAR
$lternately, you may apply the Clarifier offset
to the transmit freTuency, without changing the
receive freTuency typically, for “split” '; pile-
ups).
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
S
/
T
]
Button
7KH7XQLQJ2IIVHW,QGLFDWRUSURYLGHVDJUDSKLFDOUHSUHVHQWDWLRQRIWKH&ODUL¿HURIIVHW
In CW mode the factory default setting of the Tuning 2ffset Indicator shows the
CW Center Tuning, instead of Clari¿er 2ffset. If you wish to change this so that the
Clari¿er 2ffset is also displayed on CW, use the following procedure
[
SELECT
]
Button
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu
mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
011 BAR
DISPLAY SELECT
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button)
to select “
CLAR
Clari¿er)” replacing the default
“
CW TUNE
CW TU1I1G)” selection).
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit
to normal operation.
[
MENU
]
Button
[
Plus
(
+
)
Offset
]
[
Zero Offset
]
[
Minus
(–)
Offset
]
Page 37FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
S
/
T
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
MENU
]
Button
Background color
BASIC OPERATION:
RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
LOCK
You may lock the setting of the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob for VF2-$ freTuency tuning) and the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob for
VF2-B freTuency tuning during Split operation), to prevent accidental freTuency change.
Main Tuning Dial Knob Lock
To lock the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob, press the
[
LOCK
]
button that is located to the right of the 0ain Tuning
'ial knob. To unlock the 'ial setting, and restore nor-
mal tuning, press the
[
LOCK
]
button once more.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob Lock
To lock the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob, press the
[
CLEAR
(
LOCK
)
]
button that is located to the upper right of the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob. To unlock the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob, and restore normal tuning, press the
[
CLEAR
(
LOCK
)
]
button once more.
A
DVICE:
The lock feature will be memori]ed independently on
the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob and the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob.
DIMMER
The illumination level of the TFT display and L(' indicators above the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob), may be adjusted via
0enu items 00 and 010.
To adjust the illumination level
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
009 DIMMER LED
” for
L(' indicators) or “
010 DIMMER TFT
” for TFT
display).
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button then rotate the
[
VFO-B/
CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select the
desired illumination level.
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal op-
eration.
[
CLEAR
(
LOCK)
]
Button
[
LOCK
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
S
/
T
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
MENU
]
Button
VFO COLOR
The background color of the VF2-$ freTuency in the TFT display may be selected via 0enu item 007.
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
007 VFO COLOR
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/
CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select
from the following colors
BLUE
default)
/ SKY BLUE / GREEN / PURPLE /
RED / ORANGE / GRAY / BLACK
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
Page 38 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
BAND STACK OPERATION
The
FT
DX
1200
utili]es a triple band-stack VF2 selection techniTue, that permits you to store up to three favorite fre-
Tuencies and modes onto each band’s VF2 register. For example, you may store one freTuency each on 14 0H] CW,
5TTY, and USB, then recall these VF2s by successive, momentary presses of the
[
14
]
0H] band button. (ach $mateur
band key may similarly have up to three freTuencymode settings applied. 1ote that only the VF2-$ system has the
band stacks.
$ typical setup, for the 14 0H] band, might be arranged like this
1. 3rogram 14.0 0H], CW 0ode, then press the
[
14
]
0H] band button
. 3rogram 14.080 0H], 5TTY 0ode, then press the
[
14
]
0H] band button
3. 3rogram 14.1 0H
], SSB 0ode, then press the
[
14
]
0H] band button.
With this con¿guration, successive momentary presses
of the
[
14
]
0H] band button will allow you to step se-
Tuentially through these three VF2s.
C.S
(
CUSTOM SWITCH
)
The front panel
[
C.S
]
button may be programmed to directly access an often-used 0enu 0ode selection.
[
BAND
]
Keys
C.S Setup
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu mode
the 0enu list will appear on the display.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select the 0enu item you want to access
with the front panel
[
C.S
]
button.
3. 3ress the
[
C.S
]
button to lock in your selection.
4. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new con¿gura-
tion and exit to normal operation.
Menu Selection Recall via
[
C.S
]
button
3ress the
[
C.S
]
button.
The programmed 0enu item will appear on the display.
3ress the
[
MENU
]
button exit to normal operation.
[
C.S
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
S
/
T
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
button
[
MENU
]
button
Page 39FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
SCOPE
This function displays a convenient spectrum scope for monitoring the band conditions. Both strong and weak signals
can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner on the TFT screen. This multifunctional scope takes into consid-
eration the operator’s preference, by switching between the convenient C(1T(5 mode where the VF2 freTuency is
constantly in the center of the screen for monitoring conditions on both sides of your operating freTuency), and the FI;
mode, where the freTuency is ¿xed to the left side of the screen for convenience in monitoring in the band).
Note: Since the
FT
DX
1200
has only one receiver the audio will be muted while the spectrum scope is scanning.
1. Select an operating mode for the scope function,
either C(1T(5 or FI; mode.
ADVICE:
See the instructions on the next page for details on
individual operating modes.
. 3ress the
[
SCOPE
]
button momentarily to display
the scope screen.
Five different screens are shown on the TFT display
by pressing the
[
SCOPE
]
button.
A
DVICE:
'uring continuous sweeping, no audio will be heard.
Sweep speed can be changed in the 0enu item
“
125 SCOPE SPEED
”.
The received sound spectrum is displayed on
the $F-FFT screen. 3ress the
[
MONI
]
button to
display the received station’s transmission signal
spectrum.
2n the $F-FFT screen, either the “Spectrum 'is-
play” or the “Waterfall 'isplay” can be selected
in the 0enu item “
185 FFT DISPLAY MODE
”.
Sweep Mode
MANUAL mode
(ach time the
[
SELECT
]
button is pressed, a new
scan of the spectrum scope is shown on the TFT
display.
ASC (Automatic Spectrum-Scope Control) mode
3ress the
[
AUTO
]
button to access the $SC mode.
“
AUTO
” icon is indicated in red on the spectrum
scope display. While the 0$I1 'I$L is turned
slowly, the spectrum scope does not change. When
the 0$I1 'I$L is turned Tuickly the audio is
muted and the spectrum scope is scanned continu-
ally and displayed on the spectrum scope screen
until the 0$I1 'I$L is completely stopped. When
the spectrum scope scanning is stopped, the audio is
restored. The last scan is shown on the TFT display.
Listen to the station and slowly ¿ne tune the station.
A
DVICE:
By setting the “
126 SCOPE AUTO TIME
” menu mode,
sweeping can be carried out automatically at the pre-
set interval.
Continuous mode
3ress the
[
AUTO
]
button and hold for 1 second.
The audio is muted and the spectrum scope is
scanned continuously until the
[
AUTO
]
button is
pressed again.
Full screen spectrum scope display
Spectrum scope plus the AF-FFT display
(When the optional FFT unit is installed)
Spectrum scope Memory display
(When the Scope Memory stored)
5%12'
5%12'
#(((6
ÆÆÆÆ
5%12'
Spectrum scope display
#(((6
Page 40 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
SCOPE
CENTER mode
1. Switch operation mode to “C(1T(5 mode”.
See “Switching between C(1T(5FI; 0odes”
below for details on changing operating modes.
. 3ress the
[
SCOPE
]
button momentarily to display
the scope screen.
y
The current freTuency is displayed in the center.
y
Width of scope display can be set in the 0enu
item “
128 CENTER SPAN FREQ
”.
FIX mode
1. Switch the operation mode to “FI; mode”.
See “Switching between C(1T(5FI; 0odes”
below for details on changing operating modes.
. 3ress the
[
SCOPE
]
button momentarily to display
the scope.
y
The freTuency set in 0enu 0ode is displayed at
the leftmost start point on the screen.
y
Width of scope display can be set in 0enu 0ode
by individual band See below).
Switching Between CENTER/FIX Modes
[
SELECT
]
button
[
MENU
]
button
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu
mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
124 SCOPE
MODE
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
but-
ton) to select the “C(1T(5” or “FI;” Factory
default is “C(1T(5”).
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit
to normal operation.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob
[
CLEAR
]
button
[
S
/
T
]
button
FREQUENCY MENU MODE
1.8MHz 130 FIX 1.8MHz SPAN
3.5MHz 132 FIX 3.5MHz SPAN
5MHz 134 FIX 5.0MHz SPAN
7MHz 136 FIX 7.0MHz SPAN
10MHz 138 FIX 10MHz SPAN
14MHz 140 FIX 14MHz SPAN
18MHz 142 FIX 18MHz SPAN
21MHz 144 FIX 21MHz SPAN
24MHz 146 FIX 24MHz SPAN
28MHz 148 FIX 28MHz SPAN
50MHz 150 FIX 50MHz SPAN
Receiving Frequency
Frequency set in Menu Mode
Sending Frequency
Example of display in split operation
5%12'
5%12'
Current Frequency
Page 41FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
Button
Memorizing the Scope Screen
The
FT
DX
1200
can memori]e the scope screen in up to 10 channels, and recall it later.
[
SELECT
]
button
[
SCOPE
]
button
How to memorize
3ress and hold the
[
SELECT
]
button for one sec-
ond to memori]e the current scope screen. Up to 10
channels may be memori]ed. 2nce all 10 memories
have data in them, previous data starting with chan-
nel “1”) will be over-written, on a ¿rst-in, ¿rst-out
basis.
Recalling memorized screens
1. 3ress the
[
SCOPE
]
button several times until the
“Spectrum Scope 0emory” screen appears.
The last stored scope screen memory will be dis-
played.
3ress the
[
SCOPE
]
button to display the screens
in the following order
[
Multi-Function
]
screen
Æ
Æ
[
Spectrum scope
]
screen
Æ
Æ
[
Full screen Spectrum scope
]
screen
Æ
Æ
[
Spectrum scope+AF-FFT
]
screen*
Æ
Æ
[
Spectrum scope Memory
]
screen
Æ
* When the optional FFT unit is installed
. 3ress the
[
S
]
[
T
]
[
W
]
[
X
]
buttons to recall the
memori]
ed screen you wish.
[
S
]
[
X
] button 5ecalls the memory towards
the new memory.
1
Æ
2
Æ
3
Æ
4
......
9
Æ
10
Æ
1
Æ
2
...
[
W
]
[
T
] button 5ecalls the memory towards
the old memory.
10
Æ
9
Æ
8
Æ
7
......
2
Æ
1
Æ
10
Æ
9
...
3. To close the scope screen, press the
[
SCOPE
]
button several times until the desired screen
appears.
Erasing the memorized screens
1. 5ecall the scope screen that you wish to erase us-
ing the
[
S
]
[
T
]
[
W
]
[
X
]
button.
. 3ress and hold one of the
[
S
]
[
T
]
[
W
]
[
X
]
but-
ton for one second to erase the scope screen.
The memory channel is deleted, and the channel
numbers, for channels with higher numbers, are
decremented.
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
SCOPE
Page 42 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
ROTATOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS
When using a Y$(SU model
G-800DXA
,
G-1000DXA
,
G-2800DXA
$ntenna 5otator not supplied), it is possible to
control it from the front panel of the
FT
DX
1200
.
1. 3ress and hold in the
[
ENT
]
button one of the
[
BAND
]
key switches) for one second. The TFT dis-
play will change to the “5otator Control” con¿gura-
tion.
. 3ress either the
[
3.5
2
)]
button or the
[
7
3
)]
button
to rotate the antenna. 3ressing the
[
3.5
2
)]
button
will cause rotation to the left counter-clockwise) by
two degree steps, while pressing the
[
7
3
)]
button
will cause rotation to the right clockwise) by two
degree steps.
3. 3ress the
[
14
5
)]
button or the
[
18
6
)]
button to con-
trol the speed of rotation. 3ressing the
[
14
5
)]
button
will cause slower rotation, while pressing the
[
18
6
)]
button will speed up rotation. Usually, you will be
using the “100” speed setting.
When you are through exercising rotator control, press
the
[
ENT
]
button momentarily.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Set the starting point to match your rotator
control indicator needle via the 0enu item
“
014 ROTATOR START UP
”. The default set-
ting is ]ero north). If your controller starting
point is south, the 0enu item “
014 ROTA-
TOR START UP
” must be set to “
180
”. If not
set properly the
FT
DX
1200
display will not
show the correct direction.
When the rotator control indicator needle
does not indicate the precise antenna direc-
tion, calibrate the indicator needle precisely
to the antenna direction via the 0enu item
“
015 ROTATOR OFFSET ADJ
”.
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
[
3.5
(
2
)]
,
[
7
(
3
)]
Button
[
14
(
5
)]
,
[
18
(
6
)]
Button
[
ENT
]
Button
Counter-clockwise Rotation
Clockwise Rotation
Speed Up
Speed Down
5HPRYHWKHUXEEHUFDS¿UVW
and then connect the plug.
Speed (0 % -100 %)
“Overlap” Indicator
Direction (0° - 360°)
Page 43FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
Using the
[
UP
]
/
[
DWN
]
buttons of the
supplied MH-31
B8
Hand Microphone
The
[
UP
]
[
DWN
]
buttons on the supplied
MH-31
B8
Hand 0icrophone may also be used to manually scan
the freTuency upward or downward.
The microphone’s
[
UP
]
[
DWN
]
buttons utili]e the
tuning steps of the 0ain
Tuning 'ial knob.
When the microphone
[
FST
]
button is pressed,
the tuning rate increases by
a factor of ten, in a manner
similar to the transceiver
front panel
[
FST
]
button.
A
DVICE:
You may independently set
the tuning steps of the
[
UP
]
[
DWN
]
buttons in the $0 and F0 modes. To set new
tuning steps, use 0enu items “
156 AM CH STEP
” and
“
157 FM CH STEP
”.
Keyboard Frequency Entry
The 2perating freTuency may be entered directly into
the current VF2, using the front panel
[
BAND
]
key but-
tons.
Example: Enter 14.250.00 MHz
1. 3ress the
[
ENT
]
button to
begin the direct freTuency
entry process. 1ow, begin-
ning with the first digit of
the freTuency the leftmost
digit), we will enter the re-
Tuired digits of the freTuency.
. 3ress, in order, the digits of the operating freTuency,
using the
[
BAND
]
buttons the freTuency entry digit
or decimal point is printed on the right side of the
buttons). In this example, enter
[
1.8
1
)]
Æ
[
10
4
)]
Æ
[
GEN
.
)]
Æ
[
3.5
2
)]
Æ
[
14
5
)]
Æ
[
50
0
)]
Æ
[
50
0
)]
Æ
[
50
0
)]
Æ
[
50
0
)]
The decimal point after the “0H]” portion of the
freTuency must be entered, but no decimal point is
reTuired after the “kH]” portion.
3. 3ress the
[
ENT
]
button once more to complete the
operating freTuency entry. $ short “beep” will con-
¿rm that the entry was successful, and the new oper-
ating freTuency will appear on the display.
A
DVICE:
If you attempt to enter a freTuency outside the oper-
ating range of 30 kH] a 6 0H], the microprocessor
will ignore the attempt, and you will be returned to
the previous operating freTuency. If this happens,
please try again, taking care not to repeat the error in
the freTuency entry process.
Using the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob
You may change the VF2-
$ freTuency in 1 0 H ]
steps. 3ress the
[
MHz/μT
]
button located at the bot-
tom left of the
[
VFO-B/
CLAR
]
knob. The 1 0H]
steps will be applied to the
VF2-$ freTuency. The “
MHz 1MHz
” notation will ap-
pear in the display.
When tuning in 1 0H] steps, clockwise rotation of the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob will increase the freTuency, while
counter-clockwise rotation will decrease the freTuency.
MORE FREQUENCY NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
Page 44 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
ANTENNA SELECTION
You can switch between the two transceiver antennas. In addition, $1T can also be used as a dedicated reception an-
tenna.
(very time the
[
ANT
]
button is pressed, the antenna
terminal $1T1, $1T) on the rear panel is switched.
The selected antenna as “1” or “” appears in the
.ey Function display.
When using $1T for reception only, set in the
0enu item “
033 ANT2 SETTING
” as below.
SETTING TX ANTENNA RX ANTENNA
RX ANT1 ANT2
TRX ANT2
[
ANT
]
Button
KEY FUNCTION DISPLAY
ANTENNA TERMINALS ON THE REAR PANEL
Indicates the
selected antenna
Page 45FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
RECEIVER OPERATION
(
FRONT END BLOCK DIAGRAM
)
The
FT
DX
1200
includes a wide range of special features to suppress the many types of interference that may be encoun-
tered on the HF bands. However, real world interference conditions are constantly changing, so optimum setting of the
controls is somewhat of an art, reTuiring familiarity with the types of interference and the subtle effects of some of the
controls. Therefore, the following information is provided as a general guideline for typical situations, and a starting
point for your own experimentation.
The
FT
DX
1200
interference-¿ghting circuitry begins in its “5F” stages, and continues throughout the entire receiver
section.
FT
DX
1200
allows con¿guration of the features described below.
R. FLT
(
,)5RR¿QJ)LOWHUV
)
Three 5oofing filters, of 1 kH], 6 kH], and 3 kH]
bandwidths, are provided in the First IF, right after the
first mixer. These filters are automatically selected to
provide narrow-band selectivity to protect the following
IF and 'S3 stages. The automatically selected ¿lter may
be manually changed by the operator, if desired, for spe-
cial operating circumstances.
CONTOUR Filter
The 'S3 Contour filter has the uniTue ability to pro-
vide either a null or a peak in tunable segments of the
receiver passband. You may suppress interference and
excessive freTuency components on an incoming signal,
or you may peak those tunable freTuency segments. The
level of the null or peak, and the bandwidth, over which
it is applied, are adjustable via the 0enu.
IF SHIFT
The passband center freTuency of the IF 'S3 ¿lter may
be moved up or down by adjusting this control.
IF WIDTH
The width of the IF 'S3 ¿ltering may be adjusted using
this control.
IF NOTCH
The IF 1otch ¿lter is a high-Q notch ¿lter that can elim-
inate, or signi¿cantly reduce an interfering carrier.
DNF
(
'LJLWDO1RWFK¿OWHU
)
When multiple interfering carriers are encountered dur-
ing reception, the 'igital 1otch Filter can signi¿cantly
reduce the level of these signals.
DNR
(
Digital Noise Reduction
)
The 'S3’s 'igital 1oise 5eduction '15) feature uti-
li]es 1 different mathematical algorithms to analy]e
and suppress different noise pro¿les encountered on the
HF0 0H] bands. Choose the selection that provides
the best noise suppression, and allows the signal to rise
up out of the noise.
AGC
The $GC system is highly adaptable to changing signal
and fading characteristics, making reception possible
under the most dif¿cult conditions.
F
RONT END BLOCK DIAGRAM
Page 46 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
ATT
When extremely strong local signals or high noise degrades reception, you can use the
[
ATT
]
button to insert 6, 1, or
18-dB of 5F attenuation in front of the 5F ampli¿er.
1. 3ress the
[
ATT
]
button several times to set the de-
sired attenuation level, per the chart below.
OFF
$ttenuator is 2ff
-6dB
The incoming signal power is reduced by 6
dB Signal voltage reduced by 1)
-12dB
The incoming signal power is reduced by 1
dB Signal voltage reduced to 14)
-18dB
The incoming signal power is reduced by 18
dB Signal voltage reduced to 18)
The selected attenuation level will be indicated in
the $TT column of the .ey Function 'isplay on the
TFT display.
. To restore full signal strength through the $ttenua-
tor circuit area, press the
[
ATT
]
button to restore the
$TT display to the “2FF” position.
ADVICE:
If background noise causes a high S-meter indication on clear freTuencies, press the
[
ATT
]
button until the S-meter
drops to about “S-1”. This setting optimi]es the trade-off between sensitivity, noise, and interference immunity. $lso,
once you have tuned in a station you want to work, you may want to reduce sensitivity further add more attenua-
tion) by pressing the
[
ATT
]
button to a higher setting. This reduces the strength of all signals and noise) and can
make reception more comfortable, important especially during long QS2s. When looking for weak signals on a Tuiet
band, you will want maximum sensitivity, so the I32 should be disabled and the
[
ATT
]
button should be set to “2FF.”
This situation is typical during Tuiet times on freTuencies above 1 0H], and when using a small or negative-gain
receiving antenna on other bands.
[
ATT
]
Button
KEY FUNCTION DISPLAY
Indicates the
attenuation level
Page 47FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
μ-TUNE FILTER
(
REQUIRES THE OPTIONAL RF μ TUNING KIT
)
The 5F Tuning .it provides ultra-sharp 5F selectivity for the front end of the transceiver. Very high Q is made pos-
sible by the narrow-band design. Three 5F Tuning .its are available. The
MTU-160
covers the 1.8 0H] band. The
MTU-80/40
covers the 3. and 7 0H] bands. The
MTU-30/20
covers 10.1 and 14 0H] bands.
When any or all) of the three optional units are connected, they will be automatically adjusted to center on your operat-
ing freTuency.
The narrow bandwidth is especially useful on the low bands, when many strong signals are being received via 1VIS
propagation 1ear Vertical-Incidence Signals) within a narrow bandwidth. The added protection for the 5F stage is es-
pecially helpful in preventing I0' and blocking.
μ-Tune Operation
1. 3ress and hold in the
[
MHz/μT
]
button for one sec-
ond to activate the -Tune ¿lter. The “
μ-Tune
” will
appear on the TFT display. The
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob works as the -TU1I1G knob.
ADVICE:
The -Tune circuit will automatically align itself
to the operating freTuency.
5emember that -Tune only operates on the 14
0H] and lower bands.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to peak the re-
sponse background noise) or reduce interference.
A
DVICE:
You may observe the relative peak point of the
-Tune filter in the Tuning 2ffset Indicator on
the display, while tuning the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob.
The amount of change in the center freTuency
of the -Tune filter, when rotating the
[
VFO-
B/CLAR
]
knob, can be con¿gured using 0enu
item “
046 uTUNE DIAL STEP
”.
If the ȝ-Tune filter has been manually adjusted
away from the center freTuency, you may press
the
[
CLEAR
]
button to re-center the filter re-
sponse on the current operating freTuency.
3. 3ress and hold in the
[
MHz/μT
]
button for one sec-
ond to disengage the -Tune ¿lter
A
DVICE:
$lternate presses of the
[
MHz/μT
]
button will switch
the -Tune ¿lter between on or off.
A
DVICE:
You may change the indication of the Tuning 2ffset
Indicator to display the -Tune filter continuously
while the -Tune filter is activated. This is 0enu
item “
011 BAR DISPLAY SELECT
”. See “Changing
the Tuning 2ffset Indicator” on the next page for de-
tails of the setting.
The -Tune ¿lters are the most advanced, selective
5F preselector ¿lters ever incorporated into an $ma-
teur 5adio transceiver. The 5F selectivity provided
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
[
MHz/μT
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Button
by -Tune can be of tremendous value in ensur-
ing Tuiet, intermod-free reception even in the most
crowded bands on a contest weekend. The -Tune
¿lters provide 5F selectivity on the order of a few
do]en kH] at -6 dB, at the expense of a few dB of
system gain on bands where noise ¿gure is seldom
an issue. You will notice that the S-meter deÀection,
when -Tune is engaged, is slightly less than when
it is out of the circuit this is normal. If your antenna
system gain is so low that you cannot hear the band
noise when -Tune is engaged highly unlikely), just
switch it out, to eliminate the slight insertion loss.
TUNING OFFSET INDICATOR
Page 48 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
ȝ-TUNE FILTER
(
REQUIRES THE OPTIONAL RF ȝ TUNING KIT
)
$s you tune around on an amateur band with ȝ-Tune engaged, the microprocessor automatically commands the step-
per motor driving the toroid core to center the ¿lter on the current operating freTuency. However, you may use the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to skew the ¿lter response to one side or the other of the operating freTuency, to deal with
heavy interference on one side. To re-center the -Tune ¿lter on the operating freTuency, and eliminate any offset,
press the
[
CLEAR
]
button.
Changing the Tuning Offset Indicator
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu
mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
011 BAR
DISPLAY SELECT
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button.
4. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select “
μTUNE
-Tune)” re-
placing the default “
CW TUNE
CW TU1I1G)”
selection).
. 3
ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to lock in the new setting and
exit to normal operation.
[
MENU
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
Page 49FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
IPO
(
INTERCEPT POINT OPTIMIZATION
)
The I32 feature allows the operator to optimi]e the characteristics of the receiver front end, depending on the current
noise level and the strength of incoming signals.
3ress the
[
IPO
]
button repeatedly, to set the desired
characteristic of the receiver front end, according to the
chart below.
AMP1
$mpli¿es the incoming signals, using a low
distortion 5F preampli¿er gain approx. 10
dB).
AMP2
$mplifies the incoming signals, using a
-stage low-distortion 5F preampli¿er total
gain approx. 0 dB).
IPO
Bypasses the 5F preampli¿er, yielding direct
feed to the ¿rst mixer.
The selected receiver 5F preampli¿er will be indicated
in the I32 column of the .ey Function 'isplay on the
TFT display.
ADVICE:
2n the 10 0H] and lower bands, it generally is not
necessary to use any preampli¿er at all selecting the
“I32” position as described above will increase the
strong-signal-handling capability of the receiver, and
generally will result in more pleasant reception due
to reduced noise. If you can hear band noise with the
preampli¿ers disengaged, then a preampli¿er is gen-
erally not needed.
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
[
IPO
]
Button
KEY FUNCTION DISPLAY
Indicates which
IURQWHQG5)DPSOL¿HU
Page 50 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
R.FLT
(
ROOFING FILTERS
)
1arrow-band 5oo¿ng Filters of 1 kH], 6 kH], 3 kH] bandwidths are provided in the ¿rst IF, right after the ¿rst mixer.
These ¿lters provide protection for the nd mixer, 'S3, and other circuitry that follow and can dramatically improve
reception on a very crowded band during a contest, etc.). Typically, the $UT2 selection mode is satisfactory for most
operating situations.
3ress the
[
R.FLT
]
button to toggle the 5oofing Filter
selection.
AUTO*
1
Æ
3 kHz
Æ
6 kHz
Æ
15 kHz
Æ
AUTO
.....
*1 The “$UT2” selection mode selects the optimum bandwidth of
the 5oo¿ng ¿lter for the reception mode.
In this case, the selected bandwidth in the 5.FLT column of the
.ey Function 'isplay glows green 1ormally glows blue).
ADVICE:
In the $0F0 mode, only the 1 kH] 5oo¿ng Filter
is utili]ed.
$s you repeatedly press the
[
R.FLT
]
button, the
selected 5oo¿ng Filter bandwidth will be displayed
in the 5.FLT column of the .ey Function 'isplay
on the TFT display, denoting the 5oo¿ng Filter cur-
rently in use.
Typically, this selection will be set to “$UT2.”
QUICK POINT:
The “$UT2” selection of the 5oo¿ng Filter is based on
the operating mode. However, you may override the au-
tomatic selection, if band conditions warrant a different
usually, a tighter) selection.
[
R.FLT
]
Button
TERMINOLOGY:
$ “5oo¿ng Filter,” as its name implies, places a “5oof”
over the receiver IF system bandwidth. Starting at the
¿rst mixer, the 5oo¿ng ¿lter protects the circuitry down-
stream from strong signals, just as a roof on a house
protects the contents from rain and snow.
KEY FUNCTION DISPLAY
Indicates the receiver
,)5RR¿QJ)LOWHU
Page 51FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
IF NOISE BLANKER
(
NB
)
OPERATION
The
FT
DX
1200
includes an effective IF 1oise Blanker, which can signi¿cantly reduce noise caused by automotive igni-
tion systems.
1. 3ress the
[
NB
]
button brieÀy to reduce short dura-
tion pulse noise such as from switching transients,
automobile ignitions and power lines. The “
NB ON
”
will appear in the display to con¿rm that the 1arrow-
1B is operating.
. 3ress the
[
NB
]
button again to reduce longer-dura-
tion man-made pulse noise. The “
NBW ON
” will
appear in the display to con¿rm that the Wide-1B is
operating.
3. If desired, you may adjust the 1oise Blanker level
via 0enu item “
034 NB LEVEL
” to the point where
the offending noise is best reduced or eliminated.
See box below for details.
4. To end 1oise Blanker operation, press the
[
NB
]
but-
ton once more. The “
NB OFF
” will appear in the
display, con¿rming that the 1oise Blanker is no lon-
ger in operation.
Adjusting the Noise Blanker Level
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu
mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
034 NB
LEVEL
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button
4. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to the point where the offending
noise is best reduced or eliminated.
. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to lock in the new setting and
exit to normal operation.
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
[
NB
]
Button
[
MENU
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
KEY FUNCTION DISPLAY
Indicates the status
of the Noise Blanker
Page 52 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
CONTOUR CONTROL OPERATION
The Contour ¿lter system provides a gentle perturbation of the IF ¿lter passband. The Contour is set to either suppress,
or boost speci¿c freTuency components, and thus enhances the sound and readability of a received signal.
1. 3ress the
[
CONT/APF
]
button to activate the Con-
tour ¿lter. The 'S3 graphic display will illuminate
and the current “null” or “peak”) position of the
Contour ¿lter will appear in the C21T2U5 indica-
tor on the display.
. 5otate the
[
CONT/APF
]
knob to achieve the most
natural-sounding audio reproduction on the incom-
ing signal.
A
DVICE:
The display will show the Contour freTuency for 3
seconds whenever the
[
CONT/APF
]
knob is turned.
3. To cancel Contour tuning, press the
[
CONT/APF
]
button momentarily.
A
DVICE:
$lternate presses of the
[
CONT/APF
]
button will
switch the Contour ¿lter between on and off.
A
DVICE:
The Contour ¿lter level either a null or a peak) may
be adjusted using 0enu item “
108 CONTOUR LEV-
EL
”. The factory default setting is for a null of ±1
dB).
The bandwidth over which the Contour ¿lter effect
is applied may be adjusted using 0enu item “
109
CONTOUR WIDTH
”. The factory default setting is
10. When the set value is increased, the bandwidth
becomes wider.
5efer to Figure “
B
”, this illustrates an “inden-
tation” of the Contour filter in the center of
the passband. The Contour filter places a low-
Q “notch” in the passband, per the settings of
0enu items “
108 CONTOUR LEVEL
” and “
109
CONTOUR WIDTH
” referenced above). Counter-
clockwise rotation to the left) of the
[
CONT/
APF
]
knob causes the notch to move toward
a lower freTuency within the passband, while
clockwise rotation to the right) causes the notch
to move toward a higher freTuency within the
passband. By removing interference or unwanted
freTuency components of the incoming signal,
it is possible to make the desired signal rise out
of the background noiseinterference, enhancing
intelligibility.
QUICK POINT:
By judicious use of the Contour ¿lter, the “shoulder” of the passband response may be altered, or components may be
removed from within the passband, allowing the desired signal to rise above the background noise and interference in a
manner not obtainable with other ¿ltering systems.
[
CONT/APF
]
Button
IF BANDWIDTH IF BANDWIDTH IF BANDWIDTH
CONT/APF CONT/APF CONT/APF
[CONT/APF]
Knob
A B C
CONTOUR INDICATOR
Page 53FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
IF BANDWIDTH
Desired Signal Desired Signal Desired Signal
QRMQRM
IF BANDWIDTH IF BANDWIDTH
SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
IF SHIFT OPERATION
(
SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT MODES
)
IF SHIFT allows you to move the 'S3 ¿lter passband higher or lower, without changing the pitch of the incoming sig-
nal, and thus reduces or eliminates interference. Because the carrier tuning freTuency is not varied, there is no need to
re-tune the operating freTuency to eliminate the interference. The total passband tuning range for the IF SHIFT system
is 1 kH].
1. 5otate the
[
SHIFT
]
knob to the left or right to re-
duce the interference.
A
DVICE:
The display will show the shift value of the IF
SHIFT for 3 seconds whenever the
[
SHIFT
]
knob is
turned.
5eferring to Figure “
A
”, note the depiction of the
IF 'S3 ¿lter as the thick line, with the
[
SHIFT
]
knob in the 1 o’clock position. In Figure “
B
”, an
interfering signal has appeared inside the original
passband. In Figure “
C
”, you can see the effect
of rotating the
[
SHIFT
]
knob. The interference
level is reduced by moving the ¿lter passband so
that the interference is outside of the passband.
[
SHIFT
]
Knob
A B C
SHIFT INDICATOR
Page 54 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
A B C
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
WIDTH
(
IF DSP BANDWIDTH
)
T
UNING
(
SSB/CW/RTTY/DATA MODES
)
The IF WI'TH tuning system allows you to vary the width of the 'S3 IF passband, to reduce or eliminate interference.
0oreover, the bandwidth may actually be expanded from its default setting, should you wish to enhance incoming sig-
nal ¿delity when interference on the band is low.
1. 5otate the
[
WIDTH
]
knob to the left or right to re-
duce the interference.
A
DVICE:
The freTuency display will show the bandwidth of
the IF passband for 3 seconds whenever the
[
WIDTH
]
knob is turned.
[
WIDTH
]
Knob
5eferring to Figure “
B
”, you can see the default
bandwidth on the SSB mode.
By rotating the
[
WIDTH
]
knob to the left, the
bandwidth will narrow see Figure “
A
”, while
rotation of the
[
WIDTH
]
knob to the right, as
depicted in Figure “
C
”, will increase the band-
width.
A B C
The default bandwidths, and total bandwidth ad-
justment range, will vary according to the operat-
ing mode
SSB 0ode 1.8 kH] a 4.0 kH] default .4 kH]).
CW 0ode 00 H] a .4 kH] default .4 kH])
5TTY'$T$ 0odes 00 H] a .4 kH] default
00 H])
Using IF SHIFT and WIDTH Together
The IF SHIFT and Variable IF WI'TH features
together form a very effective interference-¿ght-
ing ¿ltering system.
For example, in Figure “
A
”, you can see how
interference has appeared both on the high
and low sides of the desired signal. 5otate the
[
WIDTH
]
knob, the interference from one side
can be eliminated Figure “
B
”). 1ext, rotate the
[
SHIFT
]
knob to re-position the passband Figure
“
C
”), the interference on the opposite side can be
removed, without re-introducing the interference
previously eliminated in Figure “
B
”.
ADVICE:
For best interference reduction, the WI'TH and
SHIFT features are the primary tools you should
use, after narrowing the bandwidth WI'TH)
andor adjusting the center of the passband
SHIFT). The Contour control may then yield
additional signal-enhancement benefits on
the net residual bandwidth. (ven more, the IF
12TCH Filter described later) may also be
used, in conjunction with these ¿lter systems, to
signi¿cant advantage.
WIDTH INDICATOR
IF BANDWIDTH IF BANDWIDTH IF BANDWIDTH
SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT
Desired Signal Desired Signal Desired Signal
QRM
QRM
QRM
QRM
QRM
QRM
IF BANDWIDTH IF BANDWIDTH IF BANDWIDTH
Page 55FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
OPERATING MODE
SSB
CW
RTTY/DATA
AM
FM
(
28/50 MHz Bands
)
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
NARROW
(
NAR
)
ONE-TOUCH IF FILTER SELECTION
3ressing the
[
NAR
]
button provides one-touch, mode-speci¿c, selection of a narrow IF 'S3 ¿lter setting that does not
reTuire resetting the
[
WIDTH
]
knob.
3ressing the
[
NAR
]
button once more returns the band-
width control to the WI'THSHIFT system. The factory
default bandwidths are
Ú
: Depends on the
[
WIDTH
]
knob
( )
: Default Bandwidth
“ON”
200 Hz ~ 1.8 kHz
Ú
(
1.8 kHz
)
50 ~ 500 Hz
Ú
(
500 Hz
)
50 ~ 500 Hz
Ú
(
500 Hz
)
6 kHz
9 kHz
“OFF”
1.8 ~ 4.0 kHz
Ú
(
2.4 kHz
)
500 Hz ~ 2.4 kHz
Ú
(
2.4 kHz
)
500 Hz ~ 2.4 kHz
Ú
(
2.4 kHz
)
6 kHz
9 kHz
[
NAR
]
S
WITCH
ADVICE:
When the narrow bandwidth is selected, the “
NAR
”
icon will appear in the display.
If the
[
NAR
]
button has been pressed to engage
the narrow ¿lter, you may still adjust the narrow IF
bandwidth by rotating the
[
WIDTH
]
knob. The IF
SHIFT is also operational. For many applications,
you may ¿nd that simply pressing the
[
NAR
]
button
instead of adjustment of the
[
WIDTH
]
knob, may be
satisfactory for interference reduction.
When you press the
[
NAR
]
button in the F0 mode,
both transmit and receive bandwidths are narrowed.
[
NAR
]
Button
WIDTH INDICATOR
Page 56 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
IF NOTCH FILTER OPERATION
(
SSB/CW/RTTY/DATA/AM MODES
)
The IF 12TCH ¿lter is a highly effective system that allows you to slice out an interfering beat note or other carrier
signal from inside the receiver passband.
1. 3ress the
[
NOTCH
]
button to activate the 1otch
filter. The 'S3 graphic display will illuminate and
the current “null” position of the 12TCH ¿lter will
appear in the 12TCH indicator on the display. The
[
NOTCH
]
knob functions as the 1otch adjustment
knob.
. 5otate the
[
NOTCH
]
knob to adjust the “null” posi-
tion of the 1otch ¿lter.
A
DVICE:
The freTuency display will show the 1otch freTuen-
cy for 3 seconds whenever the
[
NOTCH
]
knob is
turned.
3. To cancel the 12TCH filter, press the
[
NOTCH
]
button momentarily. The graphic disappears from the
12TCH indicator on the display, con¿rming that the
12TCH ¿lter is no longer in operation.
A
DVICE:
$lternate presses of the
[
NOTCH
]
button, will
switch the 12TCH ¿lter between on and off.
A
DVICE:
The bandwidth of the 12TCH ¿lter either narrow
or wide) may be adjusted using 0enu item “
111
IF NOTCH WIDTH
”. The factory default setting is
“WI'(”.
[
NOTCH
]
Button
The performance of the IF 12TCH ¿lter is illus-
trated in Figure “
A
”, where the effect of rotation
of the
[
NOTCH
]
knob is depicted. In Figure “
B
”
you can see the notching effect of the IF 12TCH
¿lter as you rotate the
[
NOTCH
]
knob to elimi-
nate the interfering heterodyne.
A B
Desired Signal Desired Signal
QRM
(Heterodyne)
QRM
(Heterodyne)
IF BANDWIDTH IF BANDWIDTH
NOTCH
NOTCH INDICATOR
Page 57FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
DIGITAL NOTCH FILTER
(
DNF
)
OPERATION
The 'igital 12TCH Filter '1F) is an effective beat-canceling ¿lter that can null out a number of interfering beat notes
inside the receiver passband. Because this is an $uto-1otch feature, there is no adjustment knob associated with this ¿l-
ter.
A
DVICE:
If a very strong interfering carrier is encountered, we recommend you ¿rst use the IF 12TCH ¿lter, as it is the most ef-
fective notching tool in the receiver section.
1. 3ress the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
DNF
”.
. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button to choose “
ON
”. The
“
DNF
” will appear in the display.
To disable the 'igital 12TCH Filter, just repeat the
above procedure, pressing the
[
SELECT
]
button to
choose “
OFF
” in step above. The “
DNF
” will turn off,
con¿rming that the 'igital 12TCH Filter is not active.
DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION
(
DNR
)
OPERATION
The 'igital 1oise 5eduction '15) system is designed to reduce the level of random noise found on the HF and 0
0H] bands, and it is especially effective during SSB operation. By setting the 0enu item “
110 DNR LEVEL
”, any of 1
different noise-reduction algorithms can be selected each of these algorithms was created for dealing with a different
noise pro¿le. You will want to experiment with the '15 system to ¿nd the best setting corresponding to the noise cur-
rently being experienced.
1. 3ress the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
DNR
”.
. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button to choose “
ON
”. The
“
DNR
” will appear in the display.
To disable the '15 system, just repeat the above proce-
dure, pressing the
[
SELECT
]
button to choose “
OFF
” in
step above. The “
DNR
” will turn off, con¿rming that
the '15 system is not active.
[
SELECT
]
button
[
SELECT
]
button
INTERFERENCE REJECTION
DNF Indicator
DNR Indicator
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button
Page 58 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
T
OOLS
FOR
C
OMFORTABLE
AND
E
FFECTIVE
R
ECEPTION
RF GAIN
The 5F Gain control provides manual adjustment of the gain levels for the receiver 5F and IF stages, to account for
noise and signal strength conditions at the moment.
1. The
[
RF/SQL
]
knob should, initially, be rotated
to the fully clockwise position. This is the point of
maximum sensitivity.
. Counter-clockwise rotation of the
[
RF/SQL
]
knob
will gradually reduce the system gain.
A
DVICE:
$s the
[
RF/SQL
]
knob is rotated counterclockwise
to reduce the gain, the S-meter reading will rise. This
indicates that the $GC voltage being applied to the
receiver is increasing this causes a reduction in re-
ceiver gain).
5otating the
[
RF/SQL
]
knob control to the fully
counter-clockwise position will essentially disable
the receiver, as the gain will be greatly reduced. In
this case, the S-meter will appear to be “pegged”
against the right edge of the analog S-meter scale.
Q
UICK POINT:
5eception freTuently can be optimi]ed by rotating
the
[
RF/SQL
]
knob slightly counter-clockwise to the
point where the “stationary” meter indication is set
just about the same as the incoming noise level. This
will reduce the 5F gain to ¿nd a level of improved
signal to noise ratio.
The 5F Gain control, along with the I32 and the $t-
tenuator features, all affect the system receiver gain
in different ways. The I32 generally should be the
¿rst feature engaged when dealing with a high noise
level, or a crowded, high-level signal environment.
$lso, the I32 generally should be the first feature
engaged, if the freTuency is low enough to allow the
preampli¿er to be bypassed. Thereafter, the 5F Gain
and $ttenuator features may be employed to provide
precise, delicate adjustment of the receiver gain to
fully optimi]e performance.
[
RF/SQL
]
Knob
Switching the Knob Functions
You may switch the
[
RF/SQL
]
knob from the 5F Gain Function to the STuelch Function via 0enu item 038.
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu
mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
038 RF
/
SQL
VR
”, then press the
[
SELECT
]
button.
3. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select “
SQL
” replacing the de-
fault “
RF
” selection).
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to lock in the new setting and
exit to normal operation.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
S
/
T
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
MENU
]
Button
Page 59FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
T
OOLS
FOR
C
OMFORTABLE
AND
E
FFECTIVE
R
ECEPTION
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
S
/
T
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
MENU
]
Button
[
CLEAR
]
Button
DSP IF FILTER TYPES
Using 'S3 arithmetic processing and the normal bandwidth characteristics of the 'S3 IF ¿lter, the sound Tuality can be
made close to a conventional analog ¿lter by rounding the shoulder of the ¿lter, or importance can be placed on the ¿lter
cut-off by making the skirt characteristics Àat. In addition, an improved ¿lter composition can be enjoyed depending on
the mode by combining the passing bandwidth characteristics and attenuation band characteristics.
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select the desired mode. See the tables
below for details.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button.
4. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to adjust the sound Tuality.
When the
[
CLEAR
]
button is pressed, the values
can be returned to their initial values.
. When the
[
SELECT
]
button is pressed followed by
the
[
MENU
]
button, the new setting will be con-
¿rmed and operation returns to normal.
Passing Bandwidth Characteristics
MODE BAND MENU ITEM
CW HF 112 HF CW SHAPE
50MHz 114 6M CW SHAPE
PSK HF 116 HF PSK SHAPE
FSK HF 118 HF FSK SHAPE
SSB HF 120 HF SSB SHAPE
50MHz 122 6M SSB SHAPE
The following settings are available.
SHARP
Set the passing bandwidth of the IF ¿lter
as amplitude characteristic. Using 'S3
arithmetic processing, a sharp and ideal
shape factor will result.
SOFT
Set the characteristic of the IF filter as a
phase characteristic. Using 'S3 arithmetic
processing, the shoulder of the filter will
become rounded and the sound Tuality
will become close to that of a conventional
analog ¿lter.
Attenuation Band Characteristics
MODE BAND MENU ITEM
CW HF 113 HF CW SLOPE
50MHz 115 6M CW SLOPE
PSK HF 117 HF PSK SLOPE
FSK HF 119 HF FSK SLOPE
SSB HF 121 HF SSB SLOPE
50MHz 123 6M SSB SLOPE
“
STEEP
”, “
MEDIUM
”, and “
GENTLE
” are selectable
for the IF ¿lter slope.
SHARP SOFT
STEEP
MEDIUM
GENTLE
Page 60 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
AUDIO PITCH CONTROL
(
SSB MODE
)
The
FT
DX
1200
permits adjustment of the receiver audio response by shifting the carrier point during SSB operation.
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
/
T
button) to select 0enu item “
105 LSB RX CAR-
RIER
” or “
106 USB RX CARRIER
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button.
4. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
/
T
button) to adjust the receiver audio response as
desired.
. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal op-
eration.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
T
OOLS
FOR
C
OMFORTABLE
AND
E
FFECTIVE
R
ECEPTION
AUDIO PEAK FILTER
1. 3ress the
[
CONT/APF
]
button to activate the $3F
$udio 3eak Filter) which provides a very narrow
audio bandwidth.
The “
APF
” indicator will appear in the 'S3 display.
A
DVICE:
When $3F is engaged, the peak position of the $3F
is depicted graphically in the 12TCH indicator on
the display.
. 3ress the
[
CONT/AFP
]
button to disable the $3F.
A
DVICE:
The $3F may only be activated while the transceiver is
in CW mode.
[
CONT/APF
]
Button
APF INDICATOR
Page 61FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
AGC
(
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL
)
The $GC system is designed to help compensate for fading and other propagation effects. The $GC characteristics can
be individually set for each operating mode. The basic objective of $GC is to maintain a constant audio output level
once a certain minimum threshold of signal strength is achieved.
3ress the
[
AGC
]
button repeatedly to select the desired
receiver-recovery time constant. You will observe the
$GC status notation in the $GC column of the .ey
Function 'isplay on the TFT display, denoting the $GC
receiver-recovery time currently in use. For most opera-
tions, we recommend the “$UT2” mode. $dditionally,
you may disable the $GC by pressing and holding in the
[
AGC
]
button for one second.
T
OOLS
FOR
C
OMFORTABLE
AND
E
FFECTIVE
R
ECEPTION
[
AGC
]
Button
NOTE:
The “$UT2” selection mode selects the optimum
receiver-recovery time for the reception mode.
In this case, the selected receiver-recovery time in
the $GC column of the .ey Function 'isplay glows
green 1ormally glows blue).
3ressing the
[
AGC
]
button allows selection of the
desired receiver-recovery time constant. 1ormally,
the “$UT2” selection is satisfactory for most situ-
ations, but in the event of operation on a crowded
band where you wish to receive a weak signal, you
may wish to change the setting to F$ST. The $UT2
mode selections are
ADVICE:
If the $GC receiver-recovery time is set to “2ff” by
pressing and holding in the
[
AGC
]
button, the S-
meter will no longer deÀect. $dditionally, you will
likely encounter distortion on stronger signals, as the
IF ampli¿ers and the following stages are probably
being overloaded.
Q
UICK POINT:
Several aspects of $GC performance may be con¿gured
via the 0enu. However, because $GC can have such a
profound impact on overall receiver performance, we
generally do not recommend any changes to the $GC
0enu selections until you are thoroughly familiar with
the performance of the
FT
DX
1200
.
TERMINOLOGY:
$utomatic Gain Control, or $GC, is a circuit that senses
the received signal strength, and then limits the gain of
the 5F and IF stages to keep the output audio volume at
a more-or-less constant level. $GC also protects the 5F,
IF, $udio, and 'S3 stages from overload, as it limits the
signal strength that is allowed to Àow, irrespective of the
input signal level.
AUTO AGC SELECTION
SLOW
FAST
MID
OPERATING MODE
LSB/USB/AM
CW/FM
RTTY/DATA
SLOPED AGC Operation
In traditional $GC systems, the audio output from the transceiver becomes essentially ¿xed once the threshold
for $GC action is reached usually several do]en dB above the no-signal noise Àoor). The
FT
DX
1200
, however,
includes an innovative Sloped $GC system on the 0ain band VF2-$) receiver, that allows the audio volume
to rise and fall slightly according to signal strength. $lthough the risefall slope is not dramatic, it is suf¿cient to
allow you to use your ear to discern and separate signals according to signal strength, not just audio freTuency.
Using Sloped $GC
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
004 AGC SLOPE
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/
CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to change the
setting to “SL23(”.
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
but-
ton to lock in the new setting and exit to normal opera-
tion.You will now be using the Sloped $GC system.
SLOPED
NORMAL
AGC start
Input Signal
Audio Output
KEY FUNCTION DISPLAY
Indicates the AGC
Page 62 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
ADJUSTABLE RECEIVER AUDIO FILTER
The
FT
DX
1200
includes an adjustable receiver audio ¿lter, that provides precise, independent control of the low and
upper audio ranges.
T
OOLS
FOR
C
OMFORTABLE
AND
E
FFECTIVE
R
ECEPTION
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
/
T
button) to ¿nd 0enu items “
050
” through “
053
”
these parameters apply to the adjustment of the
receiver audio filter in the $0 mode, 0enu items
“
057
” through “
060
” apply to the adjustment of
the 5; audio filter in the CW mode, 0enu items
“
073
” through “
076
” apply to the adjustment of
the 5; audio ¿lter in the '$T$ mode, 0enu items
“
081
” through “
084
” apply to the adjustment of
the 5; audio filter in the F0 mode, 0enu items
“
090
” through “
093
” apply to the adjustment of the
5; audio ¿lter in the 5TTY mode, and 0enu items
“
099
” through “
102
” apply to the adjustment of the
5; audio ¿lter in the SSB mode
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button.
4. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
/
T
button) to adjust the receiver audio response as
desired.
. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal op-
eration.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
MODE MENU ITEM
AVAILABLE VALUES
AM
050 AM LCUT FREQ
OFF/100(Hz) ~ 1000(Hz)
051 AM LCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
052 AM HCUT FREQ
700(Hz) ~ 4000(Hz)/OFF
053 AM HCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
CW
057 CW LCUT FREQ
OFF/100(Hz) ~ 1000(Hz)
058 CW LCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
059 CW HCUT FREQ
700(Hz) ~ 4000(Hz)/OFF
060 CW HCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
DATA
073 DATA LCUT FREQ
OFF/100(Hz) ~ 1000(Hz)
074 DATA LCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
075 DATA HCUT FREQ
700(Hz) ~ 4000(Hz)/OFF
076 DATA HCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
FM
081 FM LCUT FREQ
OFF/100(Hz) ~ 1000(Hz)
082 FM LCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
083 FM HCUT FREQ
700(Hz) ~ 4000(Hz)/OFF
084 FM HCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
RTTY
090 RTTY LCUT FREQ
OFF/100(Hz) ~ 1000(Hz)
091 RTTY LCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
092 RTTY HCUT FREQ
700(Hz) ~ 4000(Hz)/OFF
093 RTTY HCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
SSB
099 SSB LCUT FREQ
OFF/100(Hz) ~ 1000(Hz)
100 SSB LCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
101 SSB HCUT FREQ
700(Hz) ~ 4000(Hz)/OFF
102 SSB HCUT SLOPE
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
Page 63
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
1. 3ress the
[
BAND
]
button corre-
sponding to the $mateur band on
which you wish to operate.
. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
button to select the operating
mode.
3ress and hold in this button to toggle to the alternate
mode.
For example, In the LSB or USB modes, pressing
and holding in this button toggles between “LSB”
and “USB” mode.
A
DVICE:
By convention, LSB is used in the 7 0H] and lower
$mateur bands for SSB communication, and USB is
used on the 14 0H] and higher bands the 10 0H]
band is used for CW and data modes only).
3. 5otate the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob to adjust the oper-
ating freTuency. $lternately, you may use the
[
UP
]
[
DWN
]
scanning buttons on the
MH-31
B8
Hand 0i-
crophone to sweep up or down the current band.
4. 3ress the microphone
PTT
3ush To Talk) switch to
begin transmission speak into the microphone in a
normal voice level.
A
DVICE:
The “
” indicator will light up in the L(' in-
dicators area, con¿rming that transmission is in
progress.
When transmitting in the $0 mode, set a maxi-
mum carrier) power output of  Watts via the
[
PROC/CAR
]
knob.
. $djust the microphone ampli¿er gain to match the
microphone and your voice level 3ress the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
buttons to select the “
METER
”, then press the
[
SELECT
]
button to select “
ALC
”.
Close the
PTT
switch, and speak into the micro-
phone in a normal voice level.
In the SSB mode, adjust the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob so
that the $LC meter stays within the $LC ]one of the
meter up to half scale deÀection) on voice peaks.
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION
[
POWER
]
Switch
[
MIC/SPEED
]
Knob
Main Tuning Dial Knob
[
BAND
]
Keys
[
MODE
]
Button
25W
In the AM mode, adjust the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob so
that the $LC meter does not deÀect at voice peaks.
A
DVICE:
The freTuency display will show the relative micro-
phone gain level for 3 seconds whenever the
[
MIC/
SPEED
]
knob is turned.
6. 5elease the
PTT
switch at the end of your transmis-
sion. The transceiver will return to the receive mode.
Adjust to keep under this level
Page 64
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION
ADVICE:
$LC meter deÀection may be caused by excessive
drive power, but also by reÀected power detected in
the antenna system. If the impedance presented to
the transceiver is other than 0 2hms, $LC meter ac-
tion may be observed that is not related to the proper
setting of the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob. Therefore, we
recommend that you make the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob
adjustments into a dummy load or antenna system
presenting impedance very close to 0 2hms.
In the SSB mode, you may set the desired power
output via 0enu item “
177 TX MAX POWER
”. The
adjustment range is between Watts and 100 Watts.
You should always use the minimum power necessary
to maintain reliable communications.
When performing “on air” tests such as the setup of
microphone gain), be sure to check the freTuency be-
fore transmitting, to avoid interference to others who
may already be using the freTuency.
Four techniTues for exercising Transmit5eceive
control are provided on the
FT
DX
1200
. You may
choose the techniTues) that best suit your operating
needs
3ressing the microphone
PTT
switch will engage
the transmitter.
The rear panel
PTT
jack may be connected to a
foot switch or other manual switching device in
order to engage the transmitter.
3ressing the front panel
[
MOX
]
button will lock
the transmitter on. 3ress the
[
MOX
]
button again
to return to receive.
The V2; Vo ic e 2perated ;mit) circuit will
engage the transmitter automatically when you
speak into the microphone. For details of V2;
operation refer to page 73.
Adjusting the SSB TX Power Output
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu
mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
177 TX MAX
POWER
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button)
to adjust the desired power output.
A
DVICE:
The value  -100) displayed in the 0enu list is
a relative percentage of the maximum T; power
available in the selected mode. It is not the true
T; output level.
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit
to normal operation.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
ADVICE:
The T; 3ower 2utput setting cannot be stored in
any of the memory channels.
Page 65
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
The $utomatic $ntenna Tuner hereinafter referred to as the “$TU”) built into each
FT
DX
1200
is designed to ensure a
0-2hm load for the ¿nal ampli¿er stage of the transmitter. We recommend that the $TU be used whenever you operate
on the
FT
DX
1200
.
A
DVICE:
Because the $TU of the
FT
DX
1200
is located inside the station, it only adjusts the impedance presented to the trans-
ceiver at the station end of your coaxial cable feedline. It does not “tune” the SW5 at the antenna feed point itself.
When designing and building your antenna system, we recommend that every effort be made to ensure a low SW5
at the antenna feed point.
The $TU of the
FT
DX
1200
includes 100 memories for tuning data. (leven of these memories are allocated, one per
$mateur band, so that each band has at least one setting preset for use on that band. The remaining 8 memories are
reserved for the 8 most-recent tuning points, for Tuick freTuency change without the need to retune the $TU.
The $TU in the
FT
DX
1200
is designed to match impedances within the range of 16. 2hms to 10 2hms, cor-
responding to an SW5 of 31 or less on the 160 through 6 meter amateur bands. $ccordingly, simple non-resonant
whip antennas, along with random-length wires and the “G5V” antenna on most bands) may not be within the im-
pedance matching range of the $TU.
ATU OPERATION
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
1. Use the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob to set the radio to
the desired operating freTuency within the $mateur
band.
. 3ress the
[
TUNE
]
button momentarily to place the
$TU in the transmit line no adjustmenttuning will
occur yet). The “
TUNER
” icon will appear in the
display.
Q
UICK POINT:
The momentary press of the
[
TUNE
]
button will turn
the tuner on, and the microprocessor will automati-
cally select the tuning point closest to the current
operating freTuency.
3. 3ress and hold in the
[
TUNE
]
button for one second
to begin automatic tuning. The transmitter will be en-
gaged, and the “
TUNER
” icon will blink while tun-
ing is in progress. When the optimum tuning point
has been reached, the radio will return to receive,
and the “
TUNER
” icon will again glow steadily in-
stead of blinking).
4. To disconnect the $TU from the transmit line, press
the
[
TUNE
]
button momentarily. The “
TUNER
”
icon will turn off, con¿rming that the $TU has been
turned off. In the “2ff” mode, the transceiver will be
directly connected to the coaxial cable connected to
your antenna, and will respond to whatever imped-
ance is present at the station end of the coax.
A
DVICE:
The $TU circuit is located between the ¿nal ampli¿er
and the rear-panel antenna jack reception is not affected
by the $TU.
QUICK POINTS:
$s shipped from the factory, only one $TU alignment
point is saved on each $mateur band. This was memo-
ri]ed during the ¿nal alignment and performance veri¿-
cation stages on the production line.
N
OTE:
3lease check the operating freTuency before beginning
the tuning process, to be sure you are not interfering
with others who may already be using the freTuency.
T
ERMINOLOGY:
$ntenna Tuner 0emories The microprocessor of the
$TU makes a note of the selected tuning capacitors and
inductors, and stores the data for each 10 kH] window
in which tuning has occurred. This eliminates the need
to re-tune every time you return to a freTuency on which
you have already completed the tuning process.
[
TUNE
]
Button
Page 66
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
ABOUT ATU OPERATION
Figure 1 depicts a situation where normal tuning via the $TU has been successfully completed, and the tuning data has
been stored in the $TU memory. The antenna system as seen by the transmitter is shown.
In Figure , the operator has changed freTuency, and the “
HI-SWR
” icon has appeared. The operator presses and holds
in the
[
TUNE
]
button for two seconds to begin impedance matching using the $TU.
If a high SW5 condition exists above 31), corrective action must be taken in the antenna system to bring the imped-
ance closer to 0 2hms. The $TU will refuse to memori]e settings on freTuencies where the SW5 exceeds 31. $ High
SW5 may indicate a mechanical failure in the feed system, and can lead to the generation of spurious signals causing
TVI, etc.
About ATU Memories
SWR (After tuning) Less than 1.5:1
The tuner settings are stored in the $TU memory.
SWR (After tuning) Greater than 1.5:1
Tuning data will not be retained in memory. If you return to the same freTuency, the tuning process must be re-
peated.
SWR (After tuning) Greater than 3:1
The “
HI-SWR
” icon will light up, and the tuner settings, if achieved, will not be memori]ed. 3lease investigate
the high SW5 condition and resolve the problem before attempting further operation using this antenna.
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
FIGURE 1
FIGURE 2
Feed Point SWR
SWR: 3.0
Retuned Setting
Memorized ATU Tuning
The “HI-SWR” icon appears on the display
when you transmit on the frequency
SWR after ATU Tuning
Frequency
Frequency
Page 67
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER
(
SSB/AM/FM MODE
)
The
FT
DX
1200
includes a uniTue Three-Band 3arametric 0icrophone (Tuali]er that provides precise, independent con-
trol over the low, mid and treble ranges in your voice waveform. You may utili]e one group of settings when the speech
processor is off and an alternate group of settings when the speech processor is on. The speech processor feature is de-
scribed in the next chapter.
QUICK POINT:
The 3arametric (Tuali]er is a uniTue techniTue for adjusting the signal Tuality. The three audio ranges may be adjusted
so precisely, it is possible to craft an audio response that provides a natural and pleasant sound that you may not have
ever experienced before. $lternately, the effective “talk power” can be signi¿cantly enhanced.
The aspects of con¿guration that you may adjust on the 3arametric (Tuali]er are
Center Frequency The center freTuency of each of the three bands may be adjusted.
Gain The amount of enhancement or suppression) within each band may be adjusted.
Q The bandwidth over which the eTuali]ation is applied may be adjusted.
Setup of the Parametric Microphone Equalizer
1. Connect the microphone to the
MIC
jack.
. Set the 5F output power to minimum value via
0enu item “
177 TX MAX POWER
”, so you will not
cause interference to other users while making ad-
justments.
A
DVICE:
We recommend that you connect a dummy load
to one of the $ntenna jacks, and monitor your
signal on a separate receiver, to prevent interfer-
ence to other users.
You will have the best chance of hearing the ef-
fects of adjustments if you wear headphones
connected to the monitor receiver) while listen-
ing to your transmitted signal.
3. To adjust the 3arametric 0icrophone (Tuali]er
while the speech processor is disabled, press the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
MIC EQ
”, then press
the
[
SELECT
]
button to select “
ON
”.
(Tuali]er when the speech processor is disabled.
0enu items “
168
” through “
176
” apply to the ad-
justment of the 3arametric 0icrophone (Tuali]er
when the speech processor is engaged.
7. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/
CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to perform
adjustments to a particular 0enu item.
8. Close the
PTT
switch, and speak into the micro-
phone while listening to the effect of the changes
you are making. Because the overall effect on the
sound will change with each adjustment, you should
make several passes through each adjustment area, to
be sure that you are achieving the optimum settings.
. When you have completed all adjustments, press the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to
save the new settings and exit to normal operation.
If you only press the
[
MENU
]
button momentarily
to exit, none of the changes you performed will be
stored.
A
DVICE:
To roll off excessive bass response in a wide-range stu-
dio microphone, try putting a 10 dB null at 100 H] with
a bandwidth of “1” or “”, do about a 3 dB null centered
on 800 H] with a bandwidth of “3,” and then put an 8
dB peak centered on 100 H] with a bandwidth of “1.”
These are starting recommendations each microphone
and user’s voice will be different, often reTuiring differ-
ent settings.
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
MONI
]
Button
To adjust the 3arametric 0icrophone (Tuali]er with
the speech processor engaged, press the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
PROC
”, then press the
[
SE-
LECT
]
button to select “
ON
”.
“ON”
4. 3ress the
[
MONI
]
button, if you want to listen on the
FT
DX
1200
internal monitor.
. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button. The 0enu list will appear
in the display.
6. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to ¿nd the “
EQ
” 0enu area, containing 0enu
items “
159
” through “
167
” these parameters ap-
ply to the adjustment of the 3arametric 0icrophone
“ON”
Page 68
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER
(
SSB/AM/FM MODE
)
Activating the Parametric Microphone Equalizer
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
MIC/SPEED
]
Knob
1. $djust the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob, as described on
page 63.
. 3ress the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
MIC
EQ
”, then press the
[
SELECT
]
button to select “
ON
”.
If you use the 3arametric 0icrophone (Tuali]er with
the speech processor engaged, press the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
buttons to select the “
PROC
”, then press the
[
SE-
LECT
]
button to select “
ON
”.
The “
MIC EQ
” and “
PROC
”) will appear in the
display, con¿rming that the 3arametric 0icrophone
(Tuali]er is engaged.
3. 3ress the 3TT switch on the microphone, and speak
into the microphone in a normal voice level.
4. To switch the 3arametric 0icrophone (Tuali]er off,
press the
[
SELECT
]
button repeatedly until the “
MIC
EQ
” icon disappears.
3-STAGE PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER ADJUSTMENTS
(SPEECH PROCESSOR: “OFF”)
Center Frequency “159 PRMTRC EQ1 FREQ” “100”
(
Hz
)
~ “700”
(
Hz
)
“162 PRMTRC EQ2 FREQ” “700”
(
Hz
)
~ “1500”
(
Hz
)
“165 PRMTRC EQ3 FREQ” “1500”
(
Hz
)
~ “3200”
(
Hz
)
Parametric Gain “160 PRMTRC EQ1 LEVEL”
(
Low
)
“–20”
(
dB
)
~ “+10”
(
dB
)
“163 PRMTRC EQ2 LEVEL”
(
Mid
)
“–20”
(
dB
)
~ “+10”
(
dB
)
“166 PRMTRC EQ3 LEVEL”
(
High
)
“–20”
(
dB
)
~ “+10”
(
dB
)
Q
(
Bandwidth
)
“161 PRMTRC EQ1 BWTH”
(
Low
)
“1” ~ “10”
“164 PRMTRC EQ2 BWTH”
(
Mid
)
“1” ~ “10”
“167 PRMTRC EQ3 BWTH”
(
High
)
“1” ~ “10”
Parametric Gain
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
Button
3-STAGE PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER ADJUSTMENTS
(SPEECH PROCESSOR: “ON”)
Center Frequency “168 P-PRMTRC EQ1-FREQ” “100”
(
Hz
)
~ “700”
(
Hz
)
“171 P-PRMTRC EQ2-FREQ” “700”
(
Hz
)
~ “1500”
(
Hz
)
“174 P-PRMTRC EQ3-FREQ” “1500”
(
Hz
)
~ “3200”
(
Hz
)
Parametric Gain “169 P-PRMTRC EQ1-LEVEL”
(
Low
)
“–20”
(
dB
)
~ “+10”
(
dB
)
“172 P-PRMTRC EQ2-LEVEL”
(
Mid
)
“–20”
(
dB
)
~ “+10”
(
dB
)
“175 P-PRMTRC EQ3-LEVEL”
(
High
)
“–20”
(
dB
)
~ “+10”
(
dB
)
Q
(
Bandwidth
)
“170 P-PRMTRC EQ1-BWTH”
(
Low
)
“1” ~ “10”
“173 P-PRMTRC EQ2-BWTH”
(
Mid
)
“1” ~ “10”
“176 P-PRMTRC EQ3-BWTH”
(
High
)
“1” ~ “10”
Page 69
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
USING THE SPEECH PROCESSOR
(
SSB MODE
)
The
FT
DX
1200
Speech 3rocessor is designed to increase “talk power” by increasing the average power output via a so-
phisticated compression techniTue) and adjusting the audio Tuality to the menu settings “
168 P-PRMTRC EQ1 FREQ
”,
“
171 P-PRMTRC EQ2 FREQ
”, “
174 P-PRMTRC EQ3 FREQ
”). The result is improved intelligibility when conditions
are dif¿cult.
1. $djust the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob, as described on
page 63.
. 3ress the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
METER
”,
then press the
[
SELECT
]
button to select “
COMP
”
Compression) meter.
3. 3ress the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
PROC
”,
then press the
[
SELECT
]
button to select “
ON
”.
The “
PROC
” will appear in the display, con¿rming
that the Speech 3rocessor is engaged.
4. 3ress the
PTT
switch on the microphone, and speak
into the microphone in a normal voice level.
. $djust the
[
PROC/CAR
]
knob to set the compres-
sion level within the dB to 10 dB range.
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
5 ~10dB
6. To switch the Speech 3rocessor off, press the
[
SE-
LECT
]
button once more. The “
PROC
” will turn
off, con¿rming that the Speech processor is turned
off.
A
DVICE:
You may set the 5F power output via the 0enu item
“
177 TX MAX PWR
”, whether or not the Speech
3rocessor is engaged.
You may adjust the 3arametric 0icrophone (Tual-
i]er when the speech processor is engaged, using
0enu Items “
168
” through “
176
”. See page 14
for details.
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
MIC/SPEED
]
Knob
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
Button
Page 70
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
ADJUSTING THE SSB TRANSMITTED BANDWIDTH (SSB MODE)
For transmission on SSB, a default bandwidth of .4 kH] is provided. This bandwidth provides reasonable ¿delity along
with good talk power, and is typical of the bandwidth used for decades for SSB transmission. The bandwidth may be
varied by the operator, to provide different levels of ¿delity or talk power, according to your preferences.
Here are the steps to adjust the SSB transmit bandwidth
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
104 SSB TX BPF
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/
CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select the
desired bandwidth. The available selections are 100-
3000 H], 100-00 H], 00-800 H], 300-700 H],
400-600 H] and 3000 WB. The default is 300-700
H]. $ wider bandwidth will provide greater fidel-
ity. $ narrow bandwidth will compress the available
transmitter power into less spectrum, resulting in
more “talk power” for '; pile-ups.
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal op-
eration.
A
DVICE:
The Transmit 0onitor function is a very helpful way to
con¿rm the effect that changing the bandwidth will have
on ¿delity. By 3ressing the
[
MONI
]
button, you will be
able to hear the difference in sound Tuality as you make
changes.
QUICK POINTS:
The higher ¿delity associated with wide bandwidth will
be particularly enjoyable on the low bands during local
rag-chew QS2s.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
Page 71
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
VOICE MEMORY
(
SSB/AM/FM MODES:
REQUIRES OPTIONAL DVS-6 AND FH-2
)
You may utili]e the Voice 0emory capability of the
FT
DX
1200
for repetitive messages. The Voice 0emory system
includes ¿ve memories capable of storing up to 0 seconds of voice audio each. The maximum that any memory can
hold is 0 seconds.
Voice Memory Operation from the FH-2 Remote Control Keypad
You may also utili]e the Voice 0emory capability of the
FT
DX
1200
from the optional
FH-2
5emote Control .eypad,
which plugs into the rear panel’s
REM
jack.
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
Recording Your Own Voice in Memory
1. Select the LSB, USB, $0, or F0 mode using the
front panel
[
MODE
]
buttons.
. $djust the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob, as described on
page 63.
3. 3ress the
[
MEM
]
key on the
FH-2
. $ blinking “
REC
”
icon will appear in the display.
4. 3ress any of the
FH-2
’s keys numbered
[
1
]
through
[
5
]
to select that memory storage register.
ADVICE:
If you do not press the
PTT
key see next step) with-
in ¿ve seconds, the memory storage process will be
cancelled.
. 3ress the microphone’s
PTT
switch momentarily.
The “
REC
” icon will glow steadily and recording
will begin.
6. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level to
record the message such as “CQ ';, CQ ';, this
is W 6 'elta ;-5ay Charlie, W 6 'elta ;-5ay Char-
lie, 2ver”). 5emember that the time limit for record-
ing any message is 0 seconds.
Checking Your Recording
1. Be sure that the front panel
[
MOX
]
and
[
BK-IN
]
but-
ton are “2ff”.
. 3ress the
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key whichever one you just
recorded in). The “
PLAY
” icon will appear in the
display and you will hear the contents of the Voice
0emory you just recorded.
ADVICE:
You may adjust the playback level of the recording via
0enu item “
016 RX OUT LEVEL
”.
7. 3ress the
FH-2
[
MEM
]
key to terminate the message
storage process.
Page 72
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
VOICE MEMORY
(
SSB/AM/FM MODES:
R
EQUIRES OPTIONAL DVS-6 AND FH-2
)
Transmitting the Recorded Message
1. Select the LSB, USB, $0, or F0 mode using the
front panel
[
MODE
]
buttons.
. 3ress the front panel
[
BK-IN
]
button.
3. 3ress the
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key whichever one you
just recorded in). $ “
PLAY
” icon will appear in the
display and the message will be transmitted.
ADVICE:
You may adjust the transmit audio) level of the record-
ing via 0enu item “
017 TX OUT LEVEL
”.
Page 73
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
VOX
(
SSB/AM/FM MODES:
AUTOMATIC TX/RX SWITCHING USING VOICE CONTROL
)
Instead of using the microphone
PTT
switch or the front panel
[
MOX
]
switch to activate the transmitter, the V2; Vo i c e
2perated T;5; Control) system provides hands-free, automatic activation of the transmitter, based on voice input into
the microphone.
1. 3ress the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
VOX
”,
then press the
[
SELECT
]
button to select “
ON
” .
The “
VOX
” will appear in the display.
. Without pressing the
PTT
switch, speak into the
microphone in a normal voice level. When you start
speaking, the transmitter should be activated auto-
matically. When you ¿nish speaking, the transceiver
should return to the receive mode after a short de-
lay).
3. To cancel V2; and return to
PTT
operation, press
the
[
SELECT
]
button once more. The “
VOX
” will
turn off, signifying that the V2; circuitry has been
turned off.
A
DVICE:
The V2; Gain may be adjusted to prevent acciden-
tal transmitter activation in a noisy environment. To
adjust the V2; Gain
1) $ctivate the V2; circuitry, if necessary.
) 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu
mode.
3) 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
181 VOX
GAIN
”, then press the
[
SELECT
] button
.
4) While speaking into the microphone, rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button)
to the point where the transmitter is Tuickly ac-
tivated by your voice, without background noise
causing the transmitter to activate.
) When you satisfied with the setting, press the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
but-
ton to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
The “Hang-Time” of the V2; system the transmit
receive delay after the cessation of speech) may also
be adjusted via the 0enu mode. The default delay is
00 msec. To set a different delay time
1) $ctivate the V2; circuitry, if necessary.
) 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu
mode.
3) 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
182 VOX DE-
LAY
”, then press the
[
SELECT
] button
.
4) 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob while saying a
brief syllable like “$h” and listening to the hang
time for the desired delay.
) When you are satisfied with the setting, press
the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
The $nti-Trip setting adjusts the level of negative re-
ceiver audio feedback to the microphone, to prevent
receiver audio from activating the transmitter via
the microphone). This setting can also be adjusted
via 0enu item “
183 ANTI VOX GAIN
”.
V2; operation may be engaged on either Voice
modes SSB$0F0) or on $FS.-based 'ata
modes. Use 0enu item “
180 VOX SELECT
” the se-
lections are “
MIC
” and “
DATA
”).
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
Button
Page 74
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
MONITOR
(
SSB/AM/FM MODES
)
You may listen to the Tuality of your transmitted signal using the 0onitor feature.
1. 3ress the
[
MONI
]
button. The “
MONI
” will appear
on the TFT display.
. 'uring transmission, rotate the
[
MONI
]
knob to
adjust the audio level in the Headphones or speaker.
Clockwise rotation of this knob will increase the vol-
ume level.
3. To switch the 0onitor off again, press the
[
MONI
]
button once more. Confirming that the 0onitor is
now disengaged.
A
DVICE:
Because the 0onitor feature samples the transmit-
ter IF signal, it can be very useful for checking the
adjustment of the Speech 3rocessor or 3arametric
(Tuali]er on SSB, and for checking the general sig-
nal Tuality on $0 and F0.
A
DVICE:
To adjust the 0onitor level
1) $ctivate the 021I circuitry, if necessary.
) 3ress and hold in the
[
MONI
]
button for one sec-
ond to enter 0enu item “
036 MONITOR LEVEL
”.
3) 3ress the
[
SELECT
] button
.
4) While speaking into the microphone, rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button)
to adjust the monitor level.
) When you are satisfied with the setting, press
the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
[
MONI
]
Button
Page 75
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
SPLIT OPERATION USING THE TX CLARIFIER
For split T;5; operation in “casual” pile-ups, where the split is less than 10 kH], the T; Clari¿er 2ffset Tuning) fea-
ture may be utili]ed.
1. 3ress the
[
TX CLAR
]
button. The “
TX
” icon will
appear in the TFT display.
QUICK POINT:
The Clarifier is freTuently used for receiver offset
tuning. However, for '; pile-ups where the ';
station is using a split of less than 10 kH], the T;
Clari¿er function is usually the Tuickest way to set
the transmitter to the desired offset freTuency.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to set the desired
transmitter offset. $ maximum split of . kH]
may be set.
3. To exit from T; Clari¿er operation, press the
[
TX
CLAR
]
button once more. The “
TX
” icon will disap-
pear from the display.
A
DVICE:
When listening to a “pile-up” calling a '; station,
in order to ¿nd the station currently being worked,
you may press the
[
RX CLAR
]
button. Then, use
the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to ]ero in on the station
calling the '; use the S32T function on CW for
precise alignment of your freTuency). You may then
press the
[
RX CLAR
]
button again to cancel the 5;
Clari¿er, and return to reception on the '; station’s
freTuency.
-ust as with receiver Clari¿er operation, the amount
of offset from the original VF2 freTuency will ap-
pear in the display.
$s with receiver Clari¿er operation, when you turn
the T; Clari¿er off, the last-used offset is remem-
bered, and will be available if you turn the T; Clari-
¿er back on. To clear the Clari¿er offset, press the
[
CLEAR
]
button.
Q
UICK POINT:
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
When attempting to work a '; station on CW in a split
freTuency pile-up, remember that a large number of
other stations may also be using Yaesu transceivers with
capability similar to that of your
FT
DX
1200
. 2n the ';
side of the pile-up, everyone calling precisely on the
same CW freTuency will sound like a single tone! So
you may have more success if you use the 5; Clari¿er
to ¿nd a hole in the pile-up, instead of trying to ]ero-
beat the last station worked by the '; station.
&ODUL¿HU2IIVHW,QGLFDWRU
$ visual depiction of the relative offset of the Clari¿er may be displayed, using the Tuning 2ffset Indicator.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
RX CLAR
]
Button
[
TX CLAR
]
Button
[
CLEAR
]
Button
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu
mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
011 BAR
DISPLAY SELECT
”.
3. 3ress the [
SELECT
] button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button)
to select “
CLAR
” from the available choices the
factory default is “
CW TUNE
”.
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit
to normal operation.
Plus (+) Offset
Minus (-) Offset
TX Frequency = RX Frequency
Page 76
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
$ powerful capability of the
FT
DX
1200
is its Àexibility in Split FreTuency operation using the VF2-$ and VF2-B fre-
Tuency registers. This makes the
FT
DX
1200
especially useful for high-level ';-peditions. The Split operation capabil-
ity is very advanced and easy to use.
1. 5otate the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob to set the desired
5; freTuency.
. 3ress the
[
A
X
W
B
]
button, then rotate the 0ain Tun-
ing 'ial knob to set the desired split T; freTuency.
3. 3ress the
[
A
X
W
B
]
button, then press the
[
SPLIT
]
button. The VF2-B freTuency will appear in the TFT
display and the L(' indicators will look like as be-
low
VFO-A
RX
Indicator “21”
L(' glows Green)
VFO-A TX
Indicator “2FF”
L(' 2ff)
VFO-B RX
Indicator “2FF”
L(' 2ff)
VFO-B TX
Indicator “21” L(' glows 5ed)
[
SPLIT
]
Button
[
TXW
]
Button
[
A
X
W
B
]
Button
'uring Split operation, the VF2-$ register will be used
for reception, while the VF2-B register will be used
for transmission. If you press the
[
SPLIT
]
button once
more, Split operation will be cancelled.
A
DVICE:
'uring Split operation, pressing the
[
A
X
W
B
]
button
will reverse the contents of the VF2-$ and VF2-B.
3ress the
[
A
X
W
B
]
button once more to return to the
original freTuency alignment.
'uring Split operation you may listen to the T; fre-
Tuency temporarily while pressing the
[
TXW
]
button
located on the bottom left of the 0ain Tuning 'ial
knob.
While pressing the
[
TXW
]
button during split opera-
tions, the freTuency on the transmission side can be
changed. Using the 0enu item “
044 TXW DIAL SE-
LECT
”, the knob used for changing the freTuency can
be set.
When setting
VFO-A
0ain Tuning 'ial knob
When setting
VFO-B
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob
It is possible to set different operating modes for ex-
ample, LSB and USB) on the two VF2s used during
Split operation.
'uring Split operation it is also possible to set VF2-
$ and VF2-B to different $mateur bands if you use
a multi band antenna.
Quick Split Operation
The Quick Split feature allows you to set a one-touch
offset of  kH] to be applied to your radio’s VF2-B
transmit) freTuency, compared to the VF2-$ freTuency.
1.
Start with regular transceiver operation on the VF2-$.
VFO-A RX
Indicator “21” L(' glows Green)
VFO-A TX
Indicator “21” L(' glows 5ed)
VFO-B RX
Indicator “2FF”
L(' 2ff)
VFO-B TX
Indicator “2FF”
L(' 2ff)
. 3ress and hold in the
[
SPLIT
]
button for one sec-
ond to engage the Quick Split feature, and apply a
freTuency kH] above the VF2-$ freTuency to the
VF2-B freTuency register.
The VF2 con¿guration will then be
VFO-A RX
Indicator “21” L(' glows Green)
VFO-A TX
Indicator “2FF”
L(' 2ff)
VFO-B RX
Indicator “2FF”
L(' 2ff)
VFO-B TX
Indicator “21” L(' glows 5ed)
3. 3ress and hold in the
[
SPLIT
]
switch for one second
to increment the Sub VF2-B) freTuency another 
kH].
Q
UICK POINTS:
The operating mode applied to the VF2-B register
will be the same as that in use on the VF2-$ regis-
ter.
The offset of VF2-B from VF2-$ is programmed
via the 0enu and is set to  kH] at the factory.
However, other offsets may be selected using the fol-
lowing procedure
WXWXWXWXWXWXWXWXWXWZYXWZYXWZYXWZYXWZY
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
043 QUICK SPLIT
FREQ
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/
CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select the
desired offset. The available selections are ±0kH] a
0kH] factory default  kH]).
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal op-
eration.
Page 77
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
The powerful CW operating capabilities of the
FT
DX
1200
permit operation using an electronic keyer paddle, a “straight
key”, or a computer-based keying device.
SETUP FOR STRAIGHT KEY
(
AND STRAIGHT KEY EMULATION
)
OPERATION
Before starting, connect your key lines) to the front andor rear panel
KEY
jacks). Be sure the
[
BK-IN
]
button is
turned off for now.
1. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
button to engage CW operation.
The “
USB CW
” icon will appear in the display. The
“
MONI
” icon will appear in the TFT display and the
CW monitor is activated.
A
DVICE:
If you press and hold the
[
MODE
]
button, you will
engage the “CW 5everse” mode, whereby the “op-
posite” sideband injection is used, compared to the
“normal” sideband. The “
LSB CW
” icon will ap-
pear in the display if you select CW 5everse.
. 5otate the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob to select the de-
sired operating freTuency.
3. 3ress the
[
BK-IN
]
button to engage automatic acti-
vation of the transmitter when you close the CW key.
The “
BK-IN
” icon will appear in the TFT display.
A
DVICE:
When you close your CW key, the transmitter
will automatically be activated, and the CW car-
rier will be transmitted. When you release the
key, transmission will cease, and after a brief
delay, receive will be restored. The delay time is
user-programmable per the discussion on page
83.
$s shipped from the factory, the
FT
DX
1200
T;
5; system for CW is configured for “Semi-
break-in” operation. However, using 0enu item
“
063 CW BK-IN
”, you may change this setup
for full break-in QS.) operation, whereby the
switching is Tuick enough to hear incoming sig-
nals in the spaces between the dots and dashes of
your transmission. This may prove very useful
during contest and traf¿c handling operations.
4. 2peration using your CW key may now proceed.
A
DVICE:
You may adjust the CW sidetone audio level setting
of 0enu item “
036 MONITOR LEVEL
”.
To adjust the 0onitor level
1) $ctivate the 021I circuitry, if necessary.
) 3ress and hold in the
[
MONI
]
button for one
second to enter the 0enu item “
036 MONITOR
LEVEL
”.
3) 3ress the
[
SELECT
] button
.
4) While keying, rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob
or press the
S
T
button) to adjust the monitor
level.
) When you are satisfied with the setting, press
the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
If you set the
[
BK-IN
]
button to 2ff, you may prac-
tice sending CW with the sidetone only, without hav-
ing the signal go out over the air.
If you reduce power via the 0enu item “
177 TX
MAX POWER
”, the $LC meter reading will increase
this is normal and does not indicate any problem
whatsoever because increased $LC voltage is being
used to lower the power).
TERMINOLOGY:
Semi-break-in
This is a pseudo-”V2;” mode used on CW, whereby the closure of the CW key will engage the transmitter, and
release of the key will allow the receiver to recover after a short delay. 1o signals will be heard during the spaces
between dots and dashes unless the sending speed is extremely slow).
Full break-in
Full break-in also known as “Full QS.”) involves very fast switching between transmit and receive, incoming
signals may be heard between the dots and dashes as you send them. This allows you to hear a station that sud-
denly starts transmitting on your freTuency, while you are in the midst of a transmission.
CW MODE OPERATION
[
MONI
]
Button
[
BK-IN
]
Button
[
MODE
]
Button
Page 78
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CW MODE OPERATION
USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER
Connect the cable from your keyer paddle to the front or rear panel
KEY
jack.
1. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
button to engage CW operation.
The “
USB CW
” icon will appear in the display. The
“
MONI
” icon will appear in the TFT display and the
CW monitor is activated.
A
DVICE:
If you press the “CW” mode, you will engage the
“CW 5everse” mode, whereby the “opposite” side-
band injection is used, compared to the “normal”
sideband. The “
LSB CW
” icon will appear in the
display if you select CW 5everse.
. 5otate the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob to select the de-
sired operating freTuency.
3. 3ress the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
KEYER
”,
then press the
[
SELECT
]
button to select “
ON
” .
The “
KEYER
” will appear in the display, con¿rming
that the built-in (lectronic .eyer is now active.
4. 5otate the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob to set the desired
sending speed 4 a 60 W30). Clockwise rotation
of the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob will increase the keying
speed.
A
DVICE:
The display will show the keying speed for 3
seconds whenever the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob is
turned.
When you press either the “'ot” or “'ash” side
of your paddle, the CW keying tone will auto-
matically be generated.
. 3ress the
[
BK-IN
]
button to engage automatic acti-
vation of the transmitter when you press either the
“'ot” or “'ash” side of your paddle. The “
BK-IN
”
icon will appear in the TFT display.
6. CW operation utili]ing your paddle may now com-
mence.
A
DVICE:
When you utili]e your keyer paddle, the transmit-
ter will automatically be activated, and the CW
characters or a string of dots and dashes) will be
transmitted. When you release the keyer paddle con-
tacts, transmission will cease, and reception will be
restored after a brief delay. The delay time is user-
programmable, per the discussion on page 83.
[
MONI
]
Button
[
BK-IN
]
Button
ADVICE:
You may adjust the CW sidetone audio level setting
of 0enu item “
036 MONITOR LEVEL
”.
To adjust the 0oni Level
1) $ctivate the 021I circuitry, if necessary.
) 3ress and hold in the
[
MONI
]
button for one
second to enter the 0enu item “
036 MONITOR
LEVEL
”.
3) 3ress the
[
SELECT
] button
.
4) While keying, rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob
or press the
S
T
button) to adjust the monitor
level.
) When you are satisfied with the setting, press
the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
If you set the
[
BK-IN
]
button to 2ff, you may prac-
tice sending CW with the sidetone only, without hav-
ing the signal go out over the air.
If you reduce power via the 0enu item “
177 TX
MAX POWER
”, the $LC meter reading will increase
this is normal and does not indicate any problem
whatsoever because increased $LC voltage is being
used to lower the power).
[
SPEED
]
Knob
[
MODE
]
Button
Page 79
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
Full Break-in (QSK) Operation
$s shipped from the factory, the
FT
DX
1200
T;5; system for CW is con¿gured for “Semi-break-in” operation.
However, this setup may be changed to full break-in QS.) operation using 0enu item “
063 CW BK-IN
”. With
full break-in QS., the T;5; switching is Tuick enough to hear incoming signals in the spaces between the dots
and dashes of your transmission.
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
063 CW BK-
IN
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button)
to set this 0enu item to “
FULL
”.
4. When your adjustments are complete, press the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
but-
ton to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
$ number of interesting and useful features are available during (lectronic .eyer operation.
USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER
CW MODE OPERATION
Setting the Keyer Weight (Dot/Dash) Ratio
This 0enu item may be used to adjust the dotdash ratio for the built-in (lectronic .eyer. The default weighting
is 31 a dash is three times longer than a dot).
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
023 CW
WEIGHT
”.
3. 3ress the [
SELECT
] button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
] knob or press the
S
T
button)
to set the weight to the desired value. The avail-
able adjustment range is a 'ot'ash ratio of .
a 4. default value 3.0).
4. When you are ¿nished, press the
[
SELECT
]
but-
ton, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the
new setting and exit to normal operation.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
Page 80
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CW MODE OPERATION
Selecting the Keyer Operating Mode
The con¿guration of the (lectronic .eyer may be customi]ed independently for the front and rear
KEY
jacks of
the
FT
DX
1200
. This permits utili]ation of $utomatic Character Spacing $CS), if desired. This permits the use
of an electronic keyer via the front jack and a straight key or computer-driven keying line via the rear panel jack.
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
018 F KEYER
TYPE
” for the front
KEY
jack) or “
020 R KEY-
ER TYPE
” for the rear-panel
KEY
jack).
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
] button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button)
to set the keyer to the desired mode. The avail-
able selections are
OFF
The built-in (lectronic .eyer is turned
off “straight key” mode).
BUG
'ots will be generated automatically
by the keyer, but dashes must be sent
manually.
ELEKEY
Both dots and dashes will be generated
automatically when using a paddle.
ACS
Same as “
ELEKEY
” except that the spac-
ing between characters is precisely set
by the keyer to be the same length as a
dash three dots in length)
4. When you are ¿nished, press the
[
SELECT
]
but-
ton, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the
new setting and exit to normal operation.
USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
Morse
"E" & "T"
Morse
"E" & "T"
ACS
OFF
ΑβȜΑ
ACS
ON
Inter-character
Spacing too short
Page 81
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CW SPOTTING
(
ZERO-BEATING
)
“Spotting” ]eroing in on another CW station) is a handy techniTue to ensure you and the other station are precisely on
the same freTuency.
The Tuning 2ffset Indicator in the display may also be moved so you can adjust your receiver freTuency to center the
incoming station on the pitch corresponding to that of your transmitted signal.
Using the Auto Zeroing System
2nly when the optional FFT unit is installed)
3ress the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
ZIN/
SPOT
”. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
switch momentarily to
adjust the receiving freTuency to the ]ero-in automati-
cally while receiving the CW signal.
Using the SPOT System
3ress the
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
button to select the “
ZIN/
SPOT
”. 3ress the
[
MONI
]
button, then while pressing
the front panel
[
SELECT
]
button, the Spot tone will be
heard through your speaker. This tone corresponds to the
pitch of your transmitted signal. If you adjust the receiv-
er freTuency until the pitch of the received CW signal
matches that of the Spot tone, your transmitted signal
will be precisely matched to that of the other station.
5elease the
[
SELECT
]
button to turn the Spot tone off.
A
DVICE:
In a tough '; pile-up, you may actually want to
use the S32T system to ¿nd a “gap” in the spread
of calling stations, instead of ]eroing in precisely
on the last station being worked by the '; station.
From the '; side, if a do]en or more operators also
using Yaesu’s S32T system) all call precisely on the
same freTuency, their dots and dashes merge into a
single, long tone that the '; station cannot decipher.
In such situations, calling slightly higher or lower in
freTuency may get your call through.
The Tuning 2ffset Indicator in the display may be
utili]ed for CW freTuency adjustment, as well. Its
con¿guration is set via 0enu item “
011 BAR DIS-
PLAY SELECT
” at the factory, and the Tuning 2ffset
Indicator is already set to the “
CW TUNE
” selection.
Q
UICK POINTS:
The CW Spotting process utili]es the Spot tone or
the Tuning 2ffset Indicator. The actual offset pitch
is set by 0enu item “
056 CW PITCH
”. The offset
pitch may be set to any freTuency between 300 H]
and 100 H], in 0 H] steps. You can either match
tones audibly using the
[
SELECT
]
button) or tune
the receiver freTuency so that the central red marker
on the Tuning 2ffset indicator lights up. 1ote that
there are 31 “dots” on the Tuning 2ffset Indicator,
and depending on the resolution selected, the incom-
ing CW signal may fall outside the visible range of
the bar indicator, if you are not reasonably close to
the proper alignment of tones.
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
The displayed freTuency on CW normally reflects
the “]ero beat” freTuency of your offset carrier. That
is, if you were to listen on USB on 14.100.00 0H]
to a signal with a 700 H] offset, the “]ero beat” fre-
Tuency of that CW carrier would be 14.100.70 0H]
the latter freTuency is what the
FT
DX
1200
displays,
by default. However, you can change the display to
be identical to what you would see on SSB by using
0enu item “
066 CW FREQ DISPLAY
” and setting
it to “
DIRECT FREQ
” instead of the default “
PITCH
OFFSET
” setting.
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
MONI
]
Button
ZIN/SPOT Indicator
Retune: Shift to Higher Frequency
Retune: Shift to Lower Frequency
Zero-In
Page 82
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
USING CW REVERSE
If you experience a dif¿cult interference situation, where an interfering station cannot readily be eliminated, you may
wish to try receiving using the opposite sideband. This may move the interfering station’s freTuency in a direction that
may lend itself more readily to rejection.
1. To start, let’s use a typical example where you have
set the CW mode using the default “USB” injec-
tion).
. 1ow be sure your mode selection is still set for VF2-
$, and then press and hold in the
[
MODE
]
button for
one second. The “LSB” and “CW” will appear in the
display, indicating that the “LSB” injection side has
now been selected.
3. To return to the normal USB) injection side and
cancel CW 5everse operation, press and hold in the
[
MODE
]
button for one second. the “USB” and
“CW” will appear in the display).
N
OTES:
When CW 5everse is engaged, the action of the Tun-
ing 2ffset Indicator will also be reversed
When the incoming signal pitch tone is properly
aligned, the central red marker lights up whether or
not CW 5everse is engaged.
In the illustration, Figure “
A
” demonstrates the
normal CW injection setup, using the USB side.
In Figure “
B
”, CW 5everse has been engaged to
receive using LSB-side injection and eliminate
interference.
The bene¿cial effect of switching sidebands can
be clearly seen in this example.
[
MODE
]
Button
A
B
Normal CW
(USB)
Carrier
Carrier
QRM
QRM
Signal
RX Passband
RX Passband
Signal
CW Reverse
(LSB)
Retune: Shift to Lower Frequency
Retune: Shift to Higher Frequency
Zero-In
Page 83
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CW DELAY TIME SETTING
'uring semi-break-in not QS.) operation, the hang time of the transmitter, after you have ¿nished sending, may be ad-
justed to a comfortable value consistent with your sending speed. This is the functional eTuivalent of the “V2; 'elay”
adjustment used on voice modes, and the delay may be varied anywhere between 30 msec and 3 seconds via 0enu item
“
064 CW BK-IN DELAY
”.
1. 3ress the
[
BK-IN
]
button to enable CW transmission
0enu item “
063 CW BK-IN
” must be set to “
SEMI
”).
. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu mode.
3. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
064 CW BK-IN DE-
LAY
”, then press the
[
SELECT
]
button.
4. Start sending and rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to
adjust the hang time, as you prefer for comfortable
operation.
. When you are ¿nished, press the
[
SELECT
]
button,
then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new set-
ting and exit to normal operation.
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CW PITCH ADJUSTMENT
You may adjust the center freTuency of the receiver passband, and change the pitch of your offset CW carrier, to the
tone you prefer via 0enu item “
056 CW PITCH
”. The tone may be varied between 300 H] and 100 H], in 10 H] steps.
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
056 CW PITCH
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/
CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button to select the
desired tone.
4. When you are ¿nished, press the
[
SELECT
]
button,
then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new set-
ting and exit to normal operation.
TERMINOLOGY:
CW Pitch If you tuned to an exact “]ero beat” on an
incoming CW signal, you could not copy it “Zero beat”
implies a 0 H] tone). Therefore, the receiver is offset
several hundreds of H] typically), to allow your ear to
detect the tone. The BF2 offset associated with this tun-
ing that produces the comfortable audio tone) is called
the CW 3itch.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
BK-IN
]
Button
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
Page 84
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
(
U
SING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD
)
You may also utili]e the CW message capability of the
FT
DX
1200
from the optional
FH-2
5emote Control .eypad,
which plugs into the rear panel
REM
jack.
Message Memory
Five memory channels capable of retaining 0 characters each are provided using the 3$5IS standard for characters
and word length).
Example CQ CQ CQ '( W6';C . 1 characters)
--
•
--
•
-- --
•
--
--
•
--
•
-- --
•
--
--
•
--
•
-- --
•
--
--
••
•
•
-- --
--
••••
--
••
--
••
--
--
•
--
•
--
•
--
C
)
Q
)
C
)
Q
)
C
)
Q
)
'
)
(
)
W
)
6
)
'
)
;
)
C
)
.
)
STORING A MESSAGE INTO MEMORY
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select the CW 0emory 5egister into
which you wish to store the message for now, we
are just setting the message entry techniTue to .eyer
entry).
027 CW MEMORY 1
028 CW MEMORY 2
029 CW MEMORY 3
030 CW MEMORY 4
031 CW MEMORY 5
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-
B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to set the
selected CW 0emory 5egister to “
MESSAGE
”. If
you want to use your keyer paddle for message en-
try on all memories, set all ¿ve 0enu items 07 a
031) to “
MESSAGE
”.
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new settings and exit.
Contest Number Programming
Use this process if you are starting a contest, or if you somehow get out of sync with the proper number in the
middle of a contest.
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu
mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
026 CON-
TEST NUMBER
”. The current contest number ap-
pears on the TFT display.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
] button, then rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button)
to set the Contest 1umber to the desired value.
A
DVICE:
3ress the
[
CLEAR
]
button located at the upper
right of the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob) to reset the
Contest 1umber to “1”.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
CLEAR
]
Button
TERMINOLOGY:
PARIS Word Length By convention among CW and
$mateur operators utili]ed by $55L and others), the
length of one “word” of CW is de¿ned as the length of
the 0orse Code characters spelling the word “3$5 IS”.
This character dotdashspace) length is used for the
speci¿c de¿nition of code speed in “words per minute”.
N
OTE:
You must exercise care in sending to ensure that the
spaces between letters and words are accurately done if
your timing is off, the spacing may not come out right
in the stored message. For ease in setting up the keyer
memories, we recommend you set 0enu item “
018 F
KEYER TYPE
” andor “
020 R KEYER TYPE
” to “
ACS
”
$utomatic Character Spacing) while you are program-
ming the keyer memories.
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to store the new number and
exit.
Page 85
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CHECKING THE CW MEMORY CONTENTS
1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned “2ff” by the
[
BK-IN
]
button.
. 3ress the
[
MONI
]
button to enable the CW monitor.
3. 3ress the
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key, whichever memory
you just recorded in. You will hear the results in the
sidetone monitor, but no 5F energy will be transmit-
ted.
N
OTE:
You may adjust the monitor level setting using 0enu
item “
036 MONITOR LEVEL
”.
O
N-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK
1. 3ress the
[
BK-IN
]
button to enable transmission. (i-
ther Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depend-
ing on the setting of 0enu item “
063 CW BK-IN
”.
. 3ress the
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key, depending on which
CW 0emory 5egister message you wish to transmit.
The programmed message will be transmitted on the
air.
N
OTE:
If you subseTuently decide to use the “Text 0emory”
techniTue for memory storage, please note that a mes-
sage stored using keyer paddle input will not be trans-
ferred over when you select “Text 0emory techniTue”
on a particular memory register the 0enu 0ode Setting
is set to “
TEXT
”).
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
(
U
SING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD
)
MESSAGE MEMORY PROGRAMMING
(
USING YOUR PADDLE
)
1. Set the operating mode to CW.
. Set the
[
BK-IN
]
button to “2ff”.
3. Turn the internal (lectronic .eyer “2n”.
4. 3ress the
[
MEM
]
key on the
FH-2
. $ blinking “
REC
”
icon will appear in the display.
. 3ress any of the
FH-2
keys numbered
[
1
]
through
[
5
]
to begin the memory storage process, and the “
REC
”
icon will glow steadily.
6. Send the desired message using your keyer paddle.
ADVICE:
If you do not start keying within ten seconds, the
memory storage process will be cancelled.
7. 3ress the
[
MEM
]
key on the
FH-2
once more at the
end of your message. Up to 0 characters may be
stored in each of the ¿ve memories.
NOTE:
You must exercise care in sending to ensure that the
spaces between letters and words are accurately done if
your timing is off, the spacing may not come out right
in the stored message. For ease in setting up the keyer
memories, we recommend you set 0enu item “
018 F
KEYER TYPE
” andor “
020 R KEYER TYPE
” to “
ACS
”
$utomatic Character Spacing) while you are program-
ming the keyer memories.
Page 86
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
TEXT Memory
The ¿ve channels of CW message memory up to 0 characters each) may also be programmed using a text-entry tech-
niTue. This techniTue is somewhat slower than when you send the message directly from your keyer paddle, but accu-
racy of character spacing is ensured. Be sure to enter the character “`” at the end of texts.
Example 1 CQ CQ CQ '( W6';C .` 0 characters)
The seTuential Contest 1umber “Count up”) feature is another powerful feature of the CW 0emory .eyer.
Example 2  10 00 .` 1 characters)
TEXT MEMORY STORAGE
1. 3ress and hold in the
[
MENU
]
button for one second
to enter the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button to select the CW 0emory 5egister into which
you wish to store the message we are now setting
the message entry techniTue to Text entry).
027 CW MEMORY 1
028 CW MEMORY 2
029 CW MEMORY 3
030 CW MEMORY 4
031 CW MEMORY 5
A
DVICE:
The following texts are programmed to the 0(0-
25Y 4 and 0(025Y in factory default.
0(025Y 4 '( FT';100 .`
0(025Y  5 11 .`
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
] button, then rotate the
[
VFO-
B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button to set the
selected CW 0emory 5egister to “
TEXT
”. If you
want to use text message entry on all memories, set
all ¿ve 0enu items 07 a 031) to “
TEXT
”.
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new settings and exit.
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
(
U
SING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD
)
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
CW CODE
SN
AF
SX
KA
TEXT
+
,
-
.
/
CW CODE
AS
WG
KN
KK
CW CODE
AR
MIM
DU
AAA
DN
CW CODE
OS
KR
BT
CW CODE
IMI
@
AL
CW CODE
IQ
TEXT
!
”
#
$
%
TEXT
:
;
<
=
>
TEXT
?
@
[
ɏ ȪȠȫ
}
TEXT
^
_
}
TEXT
&
´
(
)
ɖ
21
9
%96':6
%
3
%
3
%
3&' -
_9
:
Ჾ
&%
Up to 50 characters
Page 87
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
(
U
SING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD
)
TEXT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
1. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
button to set the operating mode
to CW.
. Be sure that Break-in is “2ff” by pressing the
[
BK-
IN
]
button, if necessary.
3. 3ress the
FH-2
[
MEM
]
key. $ blinking “
REC
” icon
will appear in the display.
4. 3ress an
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key to select the desired CW
0emory 5egister into which you wish to program
the text, the blinking “
REC
” icon will disappear.
. Use the
FH-2
[
W
]
and
[
X
]
keys to set the cursor
position and use the
FH-2
’s
[
S
]
and
[
T
]
keys to
choose the letternumber to be programmed in each
slot of the memory. In the case of the second ex-
ample on the previous page the “
#
” character desig-
nates the slot where the Contest 1umber will appear.
A
DVICE:
You may also use the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob and
the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knobs to program the message
characters.
6. When the message is complete, add the “
}
” character
at the end to signify the termination of the message.
7. 3ress and hold in the
FH-2
[
MEM
]
key for one sec-
ond to exit, once all characters including “
}
”) have
been programmed.
C
HECKING THE CW MEMORY CONTENTS
1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned “2ff” by the
[
BK-IN
]
key.
. 3ress the
[
MONI
]
button to enable the CW monitor.
3. 3ress an
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key, whichever memory you
just recorded in. You will hear the results in the sid-
etone, but no 5F energy will be transmitted.
ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK
1. 3ress the
[
BK-IN
]
button to enable transmission. (i-
ther Full-break-in or Semi-break-in will be engaged,
depending on the setting of 0enu item “
063 CW
BK-IN
”.
. 3ress an
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key, depending on which
CW 0emory 5egister message you wish to transmit.
The programmed message will be transmitted on the
air.
Page 88
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
NOTE:
If you subseTuently decide to use the “0essage 0emo-
ry” techniTue for memory storage, please note that the
contents of a message stored using text input will not be
transferred over when you set entry to “0essage 0emo-
ry techniTue” on a particular memory register the 0enu
0ode Setting is set to “
MESSAGE
”).
Decrementing the Contest Number
Use this process if the current contest number
gets slightly ahead of the actual number you
want to send in case of a duplicate QS2, for ex-
ample).
3ress the
FH-2
[
DEC
]
key momentarily. The
current Contest 1umber will be reduced by one.
3ress of the
FH-2
[
DEC
]
key as many times as
necessary to reach the desired number. If you go
too far, use the “Contest 1umber 3rogramming”
techniTue described previously.
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
(
U
SING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD
)
Transmitting in the Beacon Mode
In “Beacon” mode, it is possible to repeatedly
transmit any message programmed, either via
paddle input, or via the “Text” input method. The
time delay between message repeats may be set
anywhere between 1 and 60 seconds 1 a 40
sec 1 secstep) or 70 a 60 sec 30 secstep))
via 0enu item “
024 BEACON TIME
” If you do
not wish the message to repeat in a “Beacon”
mode, please set this 0enu item to “
OFF
”.
To transmit the message
1. 3ress the
[
BK-IN
]
button to enable transmis-
sion. (ither Full-break-in or Semi-break-in
will be engaged, depending on the setting of
0enu item “
063 CW BK-IN
”.
. 3ress an
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key. 5epetitive trans-
mission of the Beacon message will begin.
Page 89
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
1. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
button to set the operating mode
to CW.
. Tune the receiver to a CW signal, then press and
hold the
[
SCOPE
]
switch for one second or longer.
A
DVICE:
The CW '(C2'( screen is displayed, and the de-
coded message is displayed on the screen.
N
OTE:
Interfering signals, noise, phasing, code accuracy,
and the like may prevent accurate message copy.
To cancel the CW decode function, press and hold
the
[
SCOPE
]
switch again for one second or longer.
A
DVICE:
If scrambled text is displayed due to noise and
clutter, when a CW signal is not being received,
turn the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to adjust the
threshold level.
'ecoding accuracy will increase if you turn the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob and adjust to a speed close
to that of the CW signal being received.
CW DECODE
When the optional FFT unit is installed, alphanumeric 0orse code can be decoded and displayed as text on the TFT dis-
play.
[
MODE
]
Button
[
SCOPE
]
Button
Threshold Level Adjustment
Scrambled text may be displayed due to noise and clutter, when a signal is not being received. You can adjust the
threshold level to reduce or eliminate the scrambled text.
Turn the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob, and adjust the
threshold level between 0 and 100) so text is not
displayed due to noise and the like.
1ote that text will no longer be displayed for
weak signals if you increase the level too much.
You switch between threshold level display and
normal display each time you press the
[
SE-
LECT
]
button.
The threshold level is displayed in the TFT dis-
play.
Displays the decoded
Morse code.
Displays content written to
the Contest Memory Keyer
ɦ
ɦ
If you transmit content written to the Contest Memory
Keyer (page 84), the transmit CW signal is displayed as
text.
Note that transmitted text is displayed in white.
%9
&'%1&' #(((6
%3 %3 %3 &'
-_
9
:
Ჾ
&%
%3 %3 %3 & ,#'Ჹ
AF-FFT display (see page 40)
(“Spectrum” or “Waterfall” display)
Threshold level
Page 90
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
FM MODE OPERATION
[
MODE
]
Button
[
MOX
]
Button
[
MIC/SPEED
]
Knob
Main Tuning Dial Knob
BASIC OPERATION
1. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
button repeatedly, until the “
FM
”
icon appears in the display, to select the F0 operat-
ing mode.
. 5otate the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob to select the de-
sired operating freTuency. 3ressing the microphone
[
UP
]
or
[
DWN
]
buttons will cause freTuency change
in kH] steps.
3. 3ress the microphone
PTT
switch or press the front
panel
[
MOX
]
button) to transmit. Speak into the mi-
crophone in a normal voice level. 5elease the
PTT
or
[
MOX
]
switch to return to receive.
4. $djustment of the microphone gain may be accom-
plished in two ways. $t the factory, a default level
has been programmed that should be satisfactory for
most situations. However, using 0enu item “
085
FM MIC GAIN
”, you may set a different ¿xed value,
or choose the “
MCVR
” option, which then lets you
use the front panel
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob to set the
microphone gain in the F0 mode.
A
DVICE:
You may change the tuning step of the 0ain Tuning
'ial knob via 0enu item “
153 AM
FM DIAL STEP
”.
You may change the tuning step of the microphone
[
UP
]
[
DWN
]
button via the 0enu item “
157 FM
CH STEP
”.
The Transmit 0onitor is another helpful way to veri-
fy proper adjustment of the F0 0IC Gain. By press-
ing the
[
MONI
]
button, you will be able to hear the
differences in deviation as you make adjustments.
F0 is only used in the 8 0H] and 0 0H] $ma-
teur bands covered by the
FT
DX
1200
. 3lease do not
use F0 on any other bands.
Page 91
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
REPEATER OPERATION
The
FT
DX
1200
may be utili]ed on  0H] and 0 0H] repeaters.
1. 5otate the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob to the output fre-
Tuency downlink) from the repeater.
. If CTCSS Tone operation is desiredneeded, press
the
S
T
W
X
button to select “T21(”, then press
the
[
SELECT
]
button to engage the CTCSS mode.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button to select the desired
CTCSS mode. If you just need to send the uplink en-
coding tone, select “
ENC
.” For encodedecode opera-
tion, choose “
T.SQL
” instead. The available choices
are
“
OFF
”
Æ
“
ENC
Tone (ncoder)”
 Æ
“
T.SQL
Tone STuelch)”
Æ
“
OFF
”
4. 3ress and hold in the
[
SELECT
] button to enter the
0enu item “
089 TONE FREQ
”.
. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-
B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select
the desired CTCSS Tone to be used. $
total of 0
standard CTCSS tones are provided see the CTCSS
Tone Chart).
6. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new settings and exit.
7. 3ress the
S
T
W
X
button to select “53T”, then
press the
[
SELECT
]
button to select the desired re-
peater shift direction. The selections are
“
SIMP
”
Æ
“
+
”
Æ
“
–
”
Æ
“
SIMP
”
where “
SIMP
” represents “Simplex” operation not
used on a repeater).
8. Close the microphone
PTT
switch or press the
[
MOX
]
button) to begin transmission. You will ob-
serve that the freTuency has shifted to correspond
to the programming you set up in the previous
steps, and a “
t
” notation will appear on the “10 H]”
freTuency digit while transmitting. Speak into the
microphone in a normal voice level. 5elease the
PTT
switch or
[
MOX
]
button to return to the receive
mode.
A
DVICE:
The conventional repeater shift used on  0H] is
100 kH], while on the 0 0H] band the shift may
vary between 00 kH] and 1.7 0H] or more). To
program the proper repeater shift, use 0enu items
“
087 RPT SHIFT (28MHz)
” 8 0H]) and “
088
RPT SHIFT (50MHz)
” 0 0H]), as appropriate.
CTCSS TONE FREQUENCY
(
Hz
)
67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 85.4
88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9
114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2
151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 171.3 173.8
177.3 179.9 183.5 186.2 189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5
203.5 206.5 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8
250.3 251.4
䎃䎐䎃 䎐䎃 䎐䎃 䎐䎃 䎐䎃 䎐
FM MODE OPERATION
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
MOX
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
The "t" indicator will appear in this area while transmitting.
Page 92
FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
FM MODE OPERATION
TONE SQUELCH OPERATION
You may also use “Tone STuelch” whereby your receiver will be kept silent until an incoming signal modulated with a
matching CTCSS tone is received. The receiver sTuelch will then open in response to the reception of the reTuired tone.
1. 5otate the 0ain tuning 'ial to the output freTuency
downlink) from the repeater.
. If CTCSS Tone operation is desiredneeded, press
the
S
T
W
X
button to select “T21(”, then press
the
[
SELECT
]
button to engage the CTCSS mode.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button to choose “
T.SQL
” from
the available choices of
“
OFF
”
Æ
“
ENC
Tone (ncoder)”
 Æ
“
T.SQL
Tone STuelch)”
Æ
“
OFF
”
4. 3ress and hold in the
[
SELECT
] button to enter the
0enu item “
089 TONE FREQ
”.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button to select the desired CTCSS Tone to be used.
Fifty standard CTCSS tones are provided see the
CTCSS Tone Chart).
6. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button to exit from the CTCSS
Tone setup mode.
7. $ “
d
” notation on the “1 H]” freTuency digit in
the display will indicate that the Tone 'ecoder is
engaged. $ “
t
” notation on the “1 H]” freTuency
digit while transmitting will indicate that the Tone
STuelch is engaged.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
MOX
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
Tone Decoder is engaged
Tone Squelch is engaged
Page 93FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENT MEMORY FUNCTIONS
The
FT
DX
1200
contains ninety-nine regular memories, labeled “
01
” through “
99
”, nine special programmed limit
memory pairs, labeled “
P-1L
/
P-1U
” through “
P-9L
/
P-9U
”, and ¿ve Q0B Quick 0emory Bank) memories, labeled “
C-1
”
through “
C-5
”. (ach stores various settings, in addition to the VF2-$ freTuency and mode See below). By default, the
 regular memories are contained in one group however, they can be arranged in up to six separate groups, if desired.
QUICK POINT:
The
FT
DX
1200
memory channels store the following
data not just the operating freTuency)
VF2-$ FreTuency
VF2-$ 0ode
Clari¿er status and its 2ffset FreTuency
$1T status
I32 status
5oo¿ng ¿lter status and its Bandwidth
$ttenuator status
1oise Blanker status
IF SHIFT and WI'TH status
C21T2U5 status and its 3eak FreTuency
'S3 1oise 5eduction '15) status and its
5eduction algorithm selection.
'S3 1otch ¿lter 12TCH) status
1$5
bandwidth status
'S3 $uto 1otch ¿lter '1F) status
5epeater Shift 'irection and CTCSS Tone
FreTuency
MEMORY OPERATION
QMB MEMORY CHANNEL
REGULAR MEMORY CHANNELS
PMS MEMORY CHANNELS
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
01
97
P-7L/7U
P-6L/6U
P-5L/5U
P-4L/4U
02
98
P-8L/8U
03
99
P-9L/9U
P-1L/1U
P-2L/2U
P-3L/3U
QMB
(
QUICK MEMORY BANK
)
The Quick 0emory Bank consists of ¿ve memories labeled “Q-1” through “Q-”) independent from the regular and
30S memories. These can Tuickly store operating parameters for later recall.
[
STO
]
Button
[
RCL
]
Button
QMB Channel Storage
1. Tune to the desired freTuency on the VF2-$.
. 3ress the blue
[
STO
]
button. The “beep” will con-
¿rm that the VF2-$ contents have been written to
the currently available Q0B memory.
If you repeatedly press the
[
STO
]
button, the Q0B
memories will be written in the following order
Q-2
Æ
Q-3
Æ
Q-4
Æ
Q-5
Æ
Q-1
.
2nce all ¿ve Q0B memories have data on them, previ-
ous data starting with channel
Q-1
) will be over-written
on a ¿rst-in, ¿rst-out basis.
QMB Channel Recall
1. 3ress the blue
[
RCL
]
button. The current Q0B
channel data will be shown on the freTuency dis-
play area. The “
QMB
” icon will also appear and the
0emory 0ode indicators in the L(' indicators area
will illuminate.
. 5epeatedly pressing the
[
RCL
]
button will toggle
you through the Q0B channels
Q-2
Æ
Q-3
Æ
Q-4
Æ
Q-5
Æ
Q-1
.
3. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button to return to the VF2 or 0em-
ory mode.
ADVICE:
5otating the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob, or changing the
operating mode, will place the transceiver in the “0em-
ory Tune” mode, which is a temporary “pseudo-VF2”
method of tuning off of a stored memory channel. If you
do not over-write the contents of the current memory
channel, the original contents will not be disturbed by
the initiation of 0emory Tune operation.
Page 94 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
STANDARD MEMORY OPERATION
The Standard 0emory of the
FT
DX
1200
allows storage and recall of up to  memories, each storing freTuency, mode,
and a wide variety of status information, detailed previously. 0emories may be grouped into as many as six 0emory
Groups, and additionally you get nine pairs of band-limit 30S) memories along with ¿ve Q0B Quick 0emory Bank)
memories.
Memory Storage
1. Set VF2-$ up with the freTuency, mode, and status,
the way you want to have it stored.
. 3ress the
[
A
X
M
]
button momentarily the current
channel number will start blinking in the display and
the “
MCK
” notation will appear.
3. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select the mem-
ory channel that you wish to store the data on.
4. 3ress and hold in the
[
A
X
M
]
button for one second
to store the freTuency and other data into the selected
memory channel. $ double beep will confirm that
you have held the
[
A
X
M
]
button in long enough.
Memory Channel Recall
1. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button, if necessary, to enter the
“0emory mode”.
. 3ress the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button. $ memory channel
number and the “
MCH
” notation will appear in the
display.
3. $fter pressing the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button, you may
rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select the desired
memory channel.
A
DVICE:
To work within a particular 0emory Group, press and
hold the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button for one second the “
GRP
”
notation will appear on the display), then rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select the desired 0emory
Group. 1ow press the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button the “
MCH
”
notation will appear instead of the “
GRP
”) you may
now choose the memory channel within the selected
0emory Group.
[
V/M
]
Button
[
MCH/GRP
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
A
X
M
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
MEMORY OPERATION
Page 95FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
STANDARD MEMORY OPERATION
Labeling Memories
You may wish to append an $lphanumeric “Tag” label) to a memory or memories, to aid in recollection of the chan-
nel’s use such as a club name, etc.). To do this
1. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button, if necessary, to enter the
“0emory 0ode”.
. 3ress and hold in the
[
V/M
]
button.
The data stored in the currently selected memory
channel will be displayed on the TFT.
3. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to recall the mem-
ory channel that you wish to append a label.
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button.
$ blinking cursor will appear on the ¿rst digit.
. Use the
[
W
]
and
[
X
]
keys to set the cursor position
and use the
[
S
]
and
[
T
]
keys to choose the letters,
numbers, or symbols of the desired label.
A
DVICE:
You may also use the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to pro-
gram the label.
6. 5epeat step to program the remaining letters, num-
bers, or symbols of the desired label. 18 characters
may be used in the creation of a label.
7. When you have completed the creation of the label,
press the
[
SELECT
]
button.
8. 3ress and hold the
[
V/M
]
button for one second to
save the new setting and return to normal operation.
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
V/M
]
Button
[
S
/
T
/
W
/
X
]
Button
Checking a Memory Channel Status
Before programming a channel into memory, you can check the current contents of that channel without the danger of
over-writing the channel accidentally.
1. 3ress the
[
A
X
M
]
button momentarily.
The data stored in the currently selected memory
channel will be displayed on the TFT. However,
since you are only checking the contents of the
memory channel, your radio will not have moved to
the memory channel freTuency.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select a different
memory channel. To exit from the 0emory Check
mode, press the
[
A
X
M
]
button momentarily once
more.
A
DVICE:
While the 0emory Check function is engaged, the
memory channel number will blink in the display.
While operating in the VF2 mode, using 0emory
Check, you may store the current VF2 freTuency
into the selected memory by pressing and holding in
the
[
A
X
M
]
button for one second until the double
beep). Conversely, if you wish to write the contents
of the current memory into the VF2-$ register, press
and hold in the
[
M
X
A
]
button for one second.
[
A
X
M
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
Page 96 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
Moving Memory Data to the VFO-A register
You may transfer the contents of the currently selected memory channel into the VF2-$ register, if you like.
1. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button, as necessary, to go to the
“0emory” mode.
. 3ress the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button.
3. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select the
memory channel the contents of which you wish to
transfer to VF2-$.
4. 3ress and hold in the
[
M
X
A
]
button for one second,
until you hear the double beep. The data in the se-
lected memory channel will now be transferred to
VF2-$.
A
DVICE:
This transfer of data to VF2-$ does not affect the origi-
nal contents of the memory channel this is a “copy”
function that leaves the memory contents unchanged.
[
V/M
]
Button
[
MCH/GRP
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
M
X
A
]
Button
MEMORY OPERATION
STANDARD MEMORY OPERATION
[
A
X
M
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
LOCK
]
Button
[
V/M
]
Button
Erasing Memory Channel Data
1. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button, if necessary, to enter the
VF2 mode.
. 3ress the
[
A
X
M
]
button. The data stored in the cur-
rently selected memory channel will be displayed in
the display.
3. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select the mem-
ory channel that you would like to erase.
4. 3ress the
[
LOCK
]
button to erase the contents of the
selected memory channel.
A
DVICE:
The
FT
DX
1200
can not erase the memory channels
“
01
” and “
5M-01
” through “
5M-10
” U.S. version).
If you make a mistake and wish to restore the memo-
ry’s contents, just repeat steps 1) through 4) above.
Page 97FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
STANDARD MEMORY OPERATION
Memory Tune Operation
You may freely tune off from any memory channel in a “0emory Tune” mode, this is similar to VF2 operation. So long
as you do not over-write the contents of the current memory, 0emory Tune operation will not alter the contents of the
memory channel.
1. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button to recall any memory chan-
nel.
. 3ress the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button.
3. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select the mem-
ory channel.
4. 5otate the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob or press the
[
MODE
]
button you will now observe that the
memory channel freTuency is changing.
A
DVICE:
'uring 0emory Tune operation, you may change
operating modes, and engage the offset Clari¿er,
if desired.
. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button momentarily to return to the
originally memori]ed freTuency of the current mem-
ory channel. 2ne more press of the
[
V/M
]
button will
return to VF2 operation.
NOTE:
Computer software programs utili]ing the C$T sys-
tem interface port may presume that the transceiver is
operating in the VF2 mode, for certain features like
“band mapping” andor freTuency logging, because the
“0emory Tune” mode so closely resembles the VF2
mode. Be sure that you have the
FT
DX
1200
operating in
a control mode compatible with your software’s reTuire-
ments. Use the VF2 mode if you’re not sure.
[
V/M
]
Button
[
MODE
]
Button
Main Tuning Dial Knob
Page 98 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
MEMORY GROUPS
0emory channels may be arranged into as many as six convenient groups, for easy identi¿cation and selection. For ex-
ample, you might want to designate memory groups for $0 BC stations, short-wave broadcast stations, contest freTuen-
cies, repeater freTuencies and 30S limits, or any other groupings you like.
(ach memory group is capable of holding up to 0 memory channels except 0emory Group 01 it is 1 memory chan-
nels, and the Group si]e is ¿xed). When a memory channel is grouped, the channel numbers change to correspond to the
chart below
Memory Group Assignment
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select 0enu item “
042 MEM GROUP
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
] button, then rotate the
[
VFO-
B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to set this
0enu item to “
ENABLE
” the default setting is “
DIS-
ABLE
”).
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit. 2peration
will now be restricted to the six 0emory Groups.
To cancel 0emory Group operation, repeat steps 1)
through 4) above, choosing “
DISABLE
” in step 3).
A
DVICE:
To avoid confusion, note that the 30S memory group
and the 30S memories “3-1L” through “3-U” will be
so designated.
GROUP MEMORY “OFF”
01 ~ 19
20 ~ 39
40 ~ 59
60 ~ 79
80 ~ 99
P-1L/1U ~ P-9L/9U
5M-01 ~ 5M-10
MEMORY CHANNEL NUMBER
GROUP MEMORY “ON”
1-01 ~ 1-19
2-01 ~ 2-20
3-01 ~ 3-20
4-01 ~ 4-20
5-01 ~ 5-20
P-1L/1U ~ P-9L/9U
US-1 ~ US-5
Choosing the Desired Memory Group
You may recall memories just within a particular 0emory Group, if desired.
1. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button, if necessary, to enter the
“0emory” mode.
. 3ress and hold in the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button for one
second located to the Lower right of the
[
VFO-B/
CLAR
]
knob). The “
GRP
” icon will appear on the
display.
3. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select the de-
sired 0emory Group.
4. 3ress the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button. The “
MCH
” icon will
appear on the display.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select the de-
sired 0emory Channel within the Selected 0emory
Group.
A
DVICE:
If no channels have been assigned to a particular 0emo-
ry Group, you will not have access to that Group.
[
V/M
]
Button
[
VFO-B
(
RX
)]
Button
[
MCH/GRP
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
Page 99FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
Section 7.401d) of the regulations governing amateur radio in the United States permit emergency amateur commu-
nications on the spot freTuency of 167. kH] by stations in or within .6 km of) the state of $laska. This freTuency
is only to be used when the immediate safety of human life andor property are threatened, and is never to be used for
routine communications.
The
FT
DX
1200
includes the capability for transmission and reception on 167. kH] under such emergency conditions
via the 0enu system. To activate this feature
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
SELECT
]
knob or press the
S
T
but-
ton) to select 0enu item “
184 EMERGENCY FREQ
TX
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
] button, then rotate the
[
VFO-
B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select
“
ENABLE
.”
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation. (mergency communication on this spot
freTuency is now possible.
. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button, as necessary, to enter the
0emory mode. 3ress the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button, then
rotate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select the emer-
gency channel “
EMERGENCY
”), which is found be-
tween channels “
5M-10
” and “
01
”).
N
OTE:
The receive-mode CL$5IFI(5 functions normally
while using this freTuency, but variation of the trans-
mit freTuency is not possible. The full speci¿cations
of the
FT
DX
1200
are not necessarily guaranteed on
this freTuency, but power output and receiver sensi-
tivity should be fully satisfactory for the purpose of
emergency communication.
If you wish to disable operation capability on the
$laska (mergency FreTuency, repeat the above pro-
cedures, but set the 0enu item “
184 EMERGENCY
FREQ TX
” to “
DISABLE
” in step 3.
In an emergency, note that a half-wave dipole cut
for this freTuency should be approximately 4’3” on
each leg 0’6” total length). (mergency operation
on 167. kH] is shared with the $laska-Fixed Ser-
vice. This transceiver is not authori]ed for operation,
under the FCC 3art 87, for aeronautical communica-
tions.
OPERATION ON ALASKA EMERGENCY FREQUENCY:
5167.5 KH
Z
(U.S. VERSION ONLY)
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
Page 100 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
VFO AND MEMORY SCANNING
You may scan either the VF2 or the memories of the
FT
DX
1200
, and the radio will halt scanning on any freTuency with
a signal strong enough to open the receiver sTuelch.
VFO SCANNING
1. Set the VF2-$ to the freTuency on which you would
like to begin scanning.
. 5otate the
[
RF/SQL
]
knob so that the background
noise is just silenced.
3. 3ress and hold in the microphone
[
UP
]
or
[
DWN
]
key for one second to start scanning in the speci¿ed
direction on the VF2 freTuency.
4. If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the deci-
mal point between the “0H]” and “kH]” digits of
the freTuency display will blink.
A
DVICE:
If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will
resume in about ¿ve seconds.
2n the SSBCW and SSB-based 'ata modes, the
scanner will pause on a received signal, then will
step across the signal very slowly, giving you
time to stop the scan, if you like. In these modes
on the VF2, the scanner does not stop, however.
. To cancel scanning, press the
[
PTT
]
switch.
A
DVICE:
If you press the microphone
PTT
switch during
scanning, the scanner will halt at once. However,
pressing the
PTT
switch during scanning will not
cause transmission.
You may select the manner in which the scanner re-
sumes while it has paused on a signal, using 0enu
item “
048 MIC SCAN RESUME
”. The default “
TIME
”
 sec) setting will cause the scanner to resume scan-
ning after ¿ve seconds you may change it, however,
to resume only after the carrier has dropped out.
[
RF/SQL
]
Knob
Page 101FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
MEMORY SCAN
1. Set the transceiver up in the “0emory” mode by
pressing the
[
V/M
]
button, if necessary.
. 5otate the
[
RF/SQL
]
knob so that the background
noise is just silenced.
3. 3ress and hold in the microphone
[
UP
]
or
[
DWN
]
key for one second to start scanning in the speci¿ed
direction.
A
DVICE:
If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the
decimal point between the “0H]” and “kH]”
digits of the freTuency display will blink.
If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will
resume in about ¿ve seconds.
4. To cancel scanning, press the
[
PTT
]
witch.
A
DVICE:
'uring 0emory Group operation, only the channels
within the current 0emory Group will be scanned.
If the scan has paused on a signal, pressing the mi-
crophone
[
UP
]
or
[
DWN
]
key will cause scanning to
resume instantly.
If you press the microphone
PTT
switch during
scanning, the scanner will halt at once. However,
pressing the
PTT
switch during scanning will not
cause transmission.
You may select the manner in which the scanner re-
sumes while it has paused on a signal, using 0enu
item “
048 MIC SCAN RESUME
”. 'uring memory
scanning, the default “
TIME
”  sec) setting will
cause the scanner to resume scanning after five
seconds. However, you may change this setting to
resume only after the carrier has dropped out, if you
like.
Q
UICK POINT:
If you have no interest in scanning, and wish to prohibit
the microphone
[
UP
]
[
DWN
]
keys from initiating scan-
ning, you may disable scanning control from the mi-
crophone using 0enu item “
047 MIC SCAN
” set it to
“
DISABLE
”).
VFO AND MEMORY SCANNING
[
V/M
]
Button
[
RF/SQL
]
Knob
Page 102 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
PMS
(
PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY SCANNING
)
To limit scanning and manual tuning) within a particular freTuency range, you can use the 3rogrammable 0emory
Scanning 30S) feature, which utili]es nine special-purpose memory pairs “
P-1L
/
P-1U
” through “
P-9L
/
P-9U
”). The
30S feature is especially useful in helping you to observe any operating sub-band limits, which apply to your $mateur
license class.
1. Store the Lower and Upper tuningscanning limit
freTuencies into the memory pair “
P-1L
” and “
P-1U
”,
respectively, or any other “LU” pair of memories in
the special 30S memory area. See page 4 for de-
tails regarding memory storage.
. 3ress the
[
V/M
]
button to enter the “0emory” mode.
3. 3ress the
[
MCH/GRP
]
button momentarily. The
L('s indicating the 0emory mode will illuminate.
4. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to select memory
channel “
P-1L
” or “
P-1U
”.
. 5otate the
[
RF/SQL
]
knob so that the background
noise is just silenced.
6. Turn the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob slightly to activate
memory tuning). Tuning and scanning are now limit-
ed to the range within the 3-1L3-1U limits until you
press the
[
V/M
]
button to return to memory channel
or VF2 operation.
7. 3ress and hold in the microphone
[
UP
]
or
[
DWN
]
key for one second to start scanning in the speci¿ed
direction.
A
DVICE:
If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the
decimal point between the “0H]” and “kH]”
digits of the freTuency display will blink.
If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will
resume in about ¿ve seconds.
2n the SSBCW and SSB-based 'ata modes,
the scanner will pause on a received signal, then
will step across the signal very slowly, giving
you time to stop the scan, if you like. However,
in these modes on the VF2, the scanner does not
stop.
If the scan has paused on a signal, pressing the
microphone
[
UP
]
or
[
DWN
]
key will cause scan-
ning to resume instantly.
8. If you rotate the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob in the op-
posite direction from the current scanning direction
in other words, you rotate the dial to the left when
scanning toward a higher freTuency), the direction of
the scan will reverse.
. If you press the microphone
PTT
switch during
scanning, the scanner will halt at once. 3ressing the
PTT
switch during scanning will not cause transmis-
sion.
[
V/M
]
Button
[
RF/SQL
]
Knob
[
MCH/GRP
]
Button
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
Page 103FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
RTTY
(
RADIO TELETYPE
)
OPERATION
The
FT
DX
1200
has the capability of a 5TTY decode function when the optional FFT unit is installed. You can easily
synchroni]e by aligning the marker displayed on the $F-FFT screen, together with the decode screen while receiving a
signal. 0ark freTuency 1 H]), SHIFT width 170 H]), and baudot code US) can be changed in 0enu 0ode.
RTTY DECODE
(
WITH OPTIONAL FFT UNIT
)
1. Before operating, set the 0enu items in the chart to
the right.
. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
switch, set the operating mode to
“
RTTY LSB
”.
A
DVICE:
3ress and hold the
[
MODE
]
switch for approxi-
mately one second to switch back and forth between
“
RTTY USB
” and “
RTTY LSB
”.
Generally, amateur band stations operate 5TTY in
LSB.
3. Tune to a 5TTY signal, press and hold the
[
SCOPE
]
switch for one second or longer.
The 5TTY '(C2'( screen displays, and the de-
coded text is displayed on the screen.
A
DVICE:
$lign the peak of the received signal with the mark
freTuency and shift freTuency marker of the $F-FFT
screen.
If text is displayed due to noise and band clutter,
when a 5TTY signal is not being received, turn the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to adjust and threshold level.
MENU ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES
094 POLARITY-R NOR
(
normal
)
/ REV
(
reverse
)
095 POLARITY-T NOR
(
normal
)
/ REV
(
reverse
)
097 RTTY SHIFT 170 / 200 / 425 / 850 (Hz)
098 RTTY MARK FREQ 1275/2125
(
Hz
)
Threshold Level Adjustment
Scrambled text may be displayed due to noise and band clutter, when a signal is not being received. You can ad-
just the threshold level so the scrambled text is not displayed.
Turn the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob, and adjust the
threshold level between 0 and 100) so scrambled
text is not displayed.
1ote that text will no longer be displayed for
weak signals if you increase the level too much.
You switch between threshold level display and
normal display each time you press the
[
SE-
LECT
]
button.
The threshold level is displayed in the TFT dis-
play.
NOTE:
Cross talk, noise, phasing, and the like may prevent
correct display.
If continuously sending for more than a few minutes
or if sending time is longer than receiving time, re-
duce transmit power output to between 1 and 13
using 0enu item “
177 TX MAX POWER
”.
To cancel the 5TTY decode function, press and hold the
[
SCOPE
]
switch again for one second or longer.
Displays the decoded RTTY
signal.
Displays content written to
the RTTY text memory
ɦ
ɦ
If you transmit content written to the RTTY text memory
(page 104), the transmitted RTTY signal is displayed as
text.
Note that transmitted text is displayed in white.
#(((6
%3 %3 %3 &'
9
:
Ჾ
&%
%3 %3 %3 & ,#'Ჹ
466;
&'%1&'
AF-FFT display (see page 40)
(“Spectrum” or “Waterfall” display)
Threshold level
Page 104 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
RTTY TEXT MEMORY
(
WITH OPTIONAL FFT UNIT
)
EXAMPLE OF CONNECTING RTTY COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE
Connect the 5TTY communications TU Terminal Unit) to the rear panel 5TTY3.T terminal. Be sure to read the in-
structions manual of the device to connect when connecting.
See page 13 for details on the connections and settings to use the optional USB Interface Unit “
SCU-17
”.
3hrases up to 0 characters) freTuently used in 5TTY transmission can be memori]ed by connecting the optional
FH-2
5emote Control .eypad to the rear panel 5(0 jack. Five phrases can be stored, and the memori]ed content can be
transmitted by operations on the
FH-2
.
TEXT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
1. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
button to set the operating mode
to 5TTY.
. 3ress the
FH-2
[
MEM
]
key. $ blinking “
REC
” icon
will appear in the display.
3.
3ress an
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key to select the desired 5TTY
Text 0emory 5egister into which you wish to program
the text, the blinking “
REC
” icon will disappear.
4.
Use the
FH-2
[
W
]
and
[
X
]
keys to set the cursor position
and use the
FH-2
[
S
]
and
[
T
]
keys to choose the letter
number to be programmed in each slot of the memory.
ADVICE:
You may also use the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to pro-
gram the message characters.
. When the message is complete, add the “
” character
at the end to signify the termination of the message.
6. 3ress and hold in the
FH-2
[
MEM
]
key for one sec-
ond to exit, once all characters including “
”) have
been programmed.
TU
RTTY
(
RADIO TELETYPE
)
O
PERATION
ON-THE-AIR RTTY TEXT MESSAGE PLAYBACK
3ress the
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key, depending on which 5TTY
Text 0emory 5egister message you wish to transmit.
The programmed message will be transmitted on the air.
ADVICE:
You can adjust 5TTY data output level using 0enu item
“
096 RTTY OUT LEVEL
”.
21
9
%
3
%
3
%
3&'
9
:
Ჾ
&%
466;6':6
RTTY TEXT
Page 105FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
DATA (PSK) OPERATION
The
FT
DX
1200
has a capability of a 3S. decode function when the optional FFT unit is installed. You can easily syn-
chroni]e by aligning the marker on the $F-FFT screen display, together with the decode screen while receiving a signal.
'ecoding with this transceiver supports both general B3S. and Q3S. that have error correction functions.
PSK DECODE
(
WITH OPTIONAL FFT UNIT
)
1. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
switch, set the operating mode to
“
DATA USB
”.
ADVICE:
3ress and hold the
[
MODE
]
switch for approxi-
mately one second to switch back and forth between
“
DATA USB
” and “
DATA LSB
”.
. When you have con¿gured 0enu item “
069 DATA
MODE
” to “
PSK
”, and “
194 PSK MODE
” to “
BPSK
”
or “
QPSK
”.
3. 5eceive a 3S. signal, and press and hold the
[
SCOPE
]
switch for one second or longer.
The 3S. '(C2'( screen displays, and the decoded
text is displayed on the screen.
A
DVICE:
$lign the peak of the received signal with the marker
of the $F-FFT screen.
If text is displayed due to noise and band clutter,
when a 3S. signal is not being received, turn the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to adjust and threshold level.
Threshold Level Adjustment
Scrambled text may be displayed due to noise and band clutter, when a signal is not being received. You can ad-
just the threshold level so scrambled text is not displayed.
Turn the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob, and adjust the
threshold level between 0 and 100) so scrambled
text is not displayed due to noise.
1ote that text will no longer be displayed for
weak signals if you increase the level too much.
You switch between threshold level display and
normal display each time you press the
[
SE-
LECT
]
button.
The threshold level is displayed in the TFT dis-
play.
NOTE:
Cross talk, noise, phasing, and the like may prevent
reliable decoding of the message.
You can set the data output level of data communica-
tions 3S.31, SSTV, etc.) using 0enu item “
078
DATA OUT LEVEL
”.
If continuously sending for more than a few minutes
or if sending time is longer than receiving time, re-
duce the transmit power output to between 1 and
13 using 0enu item “
177 TX MAX POWER
”.
To cancel the 3S. decode function, press and hold the
[
SCOPE
]
switch again for one second or longer.
Displays the decoded PSK
signal.
Displays content written to
the PSK text memory
ɦ
ɦ
If you transmit content written to the PSK text memory
(page 106), the transmitted PSK signal is displayed as
text.
Note that transmitted text is displayed in white.
#(((6
%3 %3 %3 &'
9
:
Ჾ
&%
%3 %3 %3 & ,#'Ჹ
25-
&'%1&'
AF-FFT display (see page 40)
(“Spectrum” or “Waterfall” display)
Threshold level
Page 106 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
PSK TEXT MEMORY
(
WITH OPTIONAL FFT UNIT
)
EXAMPLE OF DATA COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE
You can use commercial and free computer software for 3S. data communications. See the illustration below for con-
nection to your computer.
Be sure to read the instruction manual of the device to be connected to the radio and computer.
See page 13 for details on the connections and settings to use the optional USB Interface Unit “
SCU-17
”.
3hrases up to 0 characters) freTuently used in 3S. transmissions can be recorded by connecting the optional
FH-2
5emote Control .eypad to the rear panel 5(0 jack. memory channels may be recorded, and the memori]ed content
can be transmitted by operations on the
FH-2
.
TEXT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
1. 3ress the
[
MODE
]
button to set the operating mode
to '$T$.
. 3ress the
FH-2
[
MEM
]
key. $ blinking “
REC
” icon
will appear in the display.
3. 3ress an
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key to select the desired
3S. Text 0emory 5egister into which you wish to
program the text, the blinking “
REC
” icon will dis-
appear.
4. Use the
FH-2
[
W
]
and
[
X
]
keys to set the cursor po-
sition and use the
FH-2
[
S
]
and
[
T
]
keys to choose
the letternumber to be programmed in each slot of
the memory.
A
DVICE:
You may also use the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob to pro-
gram the message characters.
. When the message is complete, add the “ ” character
at the end to signify the termination of the message.
6. 3ress and hold in the
FH-2
[
MEM
]
key for one sec-
ond to exit, once all characters including “
”) have
been programmed.
DATA
(
PSK
)
OPERATION
ON-THE-AIR PSK TEXT MESSAGE PLAYBACK
3ress the
FH-2
[
1
]
a
[
5
]
key, depending on which 3S.
Text 0emory 5egister message you wish to transmit.
The programmed message will be transmitted on the air.
ADVICE:
You can adjust the 3S. transmit $LC by turning the
[
MIC/SPEED
]
knob.
ADVICE:
You can set the data output level for data communi-
cations 3S.31, SSTV, etc.) using 0enu item “
078
DATA OUT LEVEL
”.
You can set V2; '(L$Y in V2; operation for data
communications 3S.31, SSTV, etc.) using 0enu
item “
080 DATA VOX DELAY
”. You can also set data
input V2; gain using 0enu item “
079 DATA VOX
GAIN
”.
Interface device
commercially
available
To LINE IN/MIC IN,
LINE OUT/MIC OUT,
COM port, etc.
21
9
%
3
%
3
%
3&'
9
:
Ჾ
&%
25-6':6
PSK TEXT
Page 107FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
The 0enu system of the
FT
DX
1200
provides extensive customi]ation capability, so you can set up your transceiver just
the way you want to operate it. The 0enu items are grouped by general utili]ation category, and are numbered from “
001
AGC
” to “
196 E
D PSK
”.
Using the Menu
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to engage the 0enu mode.
The display will show the 0enu 1umber, the 0enu
Group 1ame and the 0enu Item.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select the 0enu item you wish to modify.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-
B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to change
the current setting of the selected 0enu item.
A
DVICE:
3ress the
[
CLEAR
]
button located on the upper
right of the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob) momentarily to
reset the selected 0enu item to the factory default
value.
4. When you have ¿nished making your adjustments,
press the
[
SELECT
]
button, then press the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and exit to normal op-
eration. If you only momentarily press the
[
MENU
]
button, the new settings will not be retained.
MENU MODE RESET
You may reset all the 0enu settings to their origi-
nal factory defaults, if desired.
1. Turn the front panel
[
POWER
]
switch off.
. 3ress and hold in the
[
MENU
]
button, and
while holding it in, press the
[
POWER
]
switch to turn the transceiver back on. 1ow
release the
[
MENU
]
button.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
CLEAR
]
Button
MENU MODE
21
9
Ჹ
᲼
Ჽ
/'07
ᲸᲸ
ᲸᲸᲸ
OUGE
OUGE
ᲸᲸᲸOUGE
(
/+&
#5
5.19
6
&'.#;
&'.#;
&'.#;
#)%ᲸᲸ
#)%ᲸᲸ
#)%ᲸᲸ
Ჹ
No. Menu Function
Group Value
Page 108 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
Group No. Menu Function Available Values Default Setting
AGC 001 FAST DELAY 20
ȡ
4000 (20msec/step) 500msec
AGC 002 MID DELAY 20
ȡ
4000 (20msec/step) 1000msec
AGC 003 SLOW DELAY 20
ȡ
4000 (20msec/step) 4000msec
AGC 004 AGC SLOPE NORMAL/SLOPE NORMAL
DISPLAY 005 MY CALL Max 12 characters FTDX1200
DISPLAY 006 MY CALL TIME OFF
ȡ
5 (sec) 1sec
DISPLAY 007 VFO COLOR BLUE/SKY BLUE/GREEN/PURPLE/RED/ BLUE
ORANGE/GRAY/BLACK
DISPLAY 008 TFT LAYOUT TYPE1/TYPE2 TYPE1
DISPLAY 009 DIMMER LED 1 / 2 2
DISPLAY 010 DIMMER TFT 0
ȡ
15 8
',63/$<  %$5',63/$<6(/(&7 &/$5&:781(ȝ781( &:781(
DISPLAY 012 METER TYPE SELECT ANALOG/BAR ANALOG
DISPLAY 013 BAR MTR PEAK HOLD OFF/0.5/1.0/2.0 (sec) OFF
DISPLAY
ɦ
1
014 ROTATOR START UP 0/90/180/270 (degree) 0
DISPLAY
ɦ
1
015 ROTATOR OFFSET ADJ -30
ȡ
0 0
DVS
ɦ
2
016 RX OUT LEVEL 0
ȡ
100 50
DVS
ɦ
2
017 TX OUT LEVEL 0
ȡ
100 50
KEYER 018 F KEYER TYPE OFF/BUG/ELEKEY/ACS ELEKEY
KEYER 019 F CW KEYER NOR/REV NOR
KEYER 020 R KEYER TYPE OFF/BUG/ELEKEY/ACS ELEKEY
KEYER 021 R CW KEYER NOR/REV NOR
KEYER 022 ELEKEY TYPE ELEKEY-A/ELEKEY-B ELEKEY-B
KEYER 023 CW WEIGHT 2.5
ȡ
3.0
ȡ
4.5 3.0
KEYER 024 BEACON TIME OFF/1
ȡ
690 (sec) OFF
KEYER 025 NUMBER STYLE 1290/AUNO/AUNT/A2NO/A2NT/12NO/12NT 1290
KEYER 026 CONTEST NUMBER 0
ȡ
9999 1
KEYER 027 CW MEMORY 1 TEXT/MESSAGE MESSAGE
KEYER 028 CW MEMORY 2 TEXT/MESSAGE MESSAGE
KEYER 029 CW MEMORY 3 TEXT/MESSAGE MESSAGE
KEYER 030 CW MEMORY 4 TEXT/MESSAGE TEXT
KEYER 031 CW MEMORY 5 TEXT/MESSAGE TEXT
GENERAL 032 ANT SELECT BAND/STACK BAND
GENERAL 033 ANT2 SETTING TRX / R2/1 TRX
GENERAL 034 NB LEVEL 0
ȡ
100 50
GENERAL 035 BEEP LEVEL 0
ȡ
100 50
GENERAL 036 MONITOR LEVEL 0
ȡ
100 50
GENERAL 037 MOX ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE
GENERAL 038 RF/SQL VR RF/SQL RF
GENERAL 039 CAT RATE 4800/9600/19200/38400 (bps) 4800bps
GENERAL 040 CAT TIME OUT TIMER 10/100/1000/3000 (msec) 10msec
GENERAL 041 CAT RTS ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE
GENERAL 042 MEM GROUP ENABLE/DISABLE DISABLE
GENERAL 043 QUICK SPLIT FREQ -20
ȡ
+20 (kHz) 5kHz
GENERAL 044 TXW DIAL SELECT VFO-A/VFO-B VFO-B
GENERAL 045 TX TIME OUT TIMER OFF/1
ȡ
30 (min) OFF
GENERAL
ɦ
3
046 uTUNE DIAL STEP DIAL STEP-2/DIAL STEP-1 DIAL STEP-1
GENERAL 047 MIC SCAN ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE
GENERAL 048 MIC SCAN RESUME PAUSE/TIME TIME
GENERAL 049 FREQ ADJ -25
ȡ
0
ȡ
+25 0
MODE-AM 050 AM LCUT FREQ OFF/100Hz
ȡ
1000Hz (50Hz/step) OFF
MODE-AM 051 AM LCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 6dB/oct
MODE-AM 052 AM HCUT FREQ 700Hz
ȡ
4000Hz (50Hz/step) / OFF OFF
ɦ
1: Requires optional Antenna Rotator.
ɦ
2: Requires optional DVS-6 Voice Memory Unit.
ɦ
3: Requires optional RF uTuning Kit.
MENU MODE
Page 109FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
Group No. Menu Function Available Values Default Setting
MODE-AM 053 AM HCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 6dB/oct
MODE-AM 054 AM MIC GAIN MCVR/FIX (0
ȡ
100) 30
MODE-AM 055 AM MIC SEL FRONT/DATA FRONT
MODE-CW 056 CW PITCH 300
ȡ
1050 (10Hz/step) 700Hz
MODE-CW 057 CW LCUT FREQ OFF/100
ȡ
1000 (50Hz/step) 250Hz
MODE-CW 058 CW LCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 18dB/oct
MODE-CW 059 CW HCUT FREQ 700
ȡ
4000 (50Hz/step) / OFF 1200Hz
MODE-CW 060 CW HCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 18dB/oct
MODE-CW 061 CW AUTO MODE OFF/50M/ON OFF
MODE-CW 062 CW BFO USB/LSB/AUTO USB
MODE-CW 063 CW BK-IN SEMI/FULL SEMI
MODE-CW 064 CW BK-IN DELAY 30
ȡ
3000 (msec) 200msec
MODE-CW 065 CW WAVE SHAPE 1/2/4/6 (msec) 4msec
MODE-CW 066 CW FREQ DISPLAY DIRECT FREQ/PITCH OFFSET
PITCH OFFSET
MODE-CW 067 PC KEYING OFF/ON OFF
MODE-CW 068 QSK 15/20/25/30 (msec) 15msec
MODE-DATA 069 DATA MODE PSK/OTHERS PSK
MODE-DATA 070 PSK TONE 1000/1500/2000 (Hz) 1000Hz
MODE-DATA 071 OTHER DISP (SSB) -3000
ȡ
0
ȡ
+3000 (10Hz/step) 0Hz
MODE-DATA 072 OTHER SHIFT (SSB) -3000
ȡ
0
ȡ
+3000 (10Hz/step) 1000Hz
MODE-DATA 073 DATA LCUT FREQ OFF/100
ȡ
1000 (50Hz/step) 300Hz
MODE-DATA 074 DATA LCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 18dB/oct
MODE-DATA 075 DATA HCUT FREQ 700
ȡ
4000 (50Hz/step) / OFF 3000Hz
MODE-DATA 076 DATA HCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 18dB/oct
MODE-DATA 077 DATA MIC GAIN MCVR/FIX (0
ȡ
100) MCVR
MODE-DATA 078 DATA OUT LEVEL 0
ȡ
100 50
MODE-DATA 079 DATA VOX GAIN 0
ȡ
100 50
MODE-DATA 080 DATA VOX DELAY 30
ȡ
300
ȡ
3000 (msec) 300msec
MODE-FM 081 FM LCUT FREQ OFF/100
ȡ
1000 (50Hz/step) 250Hz
MODE-FM 082 FM LCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 18dB/oct
MODE-FM 083 FM HCUT FREQ 700
ȡ
4000 (50Hz/step) / OFF OFF
MODE-FM 084 FM HCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 6dB/oct
MODE-FM 085 FM MIC GAIN MCVR/FIX (0
ȡ
100) 30
MODE-FM 086 FM MIC SEL FRONT/DATA FRONT
MODE-FM 087 RPT SHIFT (28MHz) 0
ȡ
100
ȡ
1000 (10kHz/step) 100kHz
MODE-FM 088 RPT SHIFT (50MHz) 0
ȡ
100
ȡ
1000
ȡ
4000 (10kHz/step) 1000kHz
MODE-FM 089 TONE FREQ 67.0
ȡ
254.1 (Hz) 67.0Hz
MODE-RTTY 090 RTTY LCUT FREQ OFF/100
ȡ
1000 (50Hz/step) 300Hz
MODE-RTTY 091 RTTY LCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 18dB/oct
MODE-RTTY 092 RTTY HCUT FREQ 700
ȡ
4000 (50Hz/step) / OFF 3000Hz
MODE-RTTY 093 RTTY HCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 18dB/oct
MODE-RTTY 094 POLARITY-R NOR/REV NOR
MODE-RTTY 095 POLARITY-T NOR/REV NOR
MODE-RTTY 096 RTTY OUT LEVEL 0
ȡ
100 50
MODE-RTTY 097 RTTY SHIFT 170/200/425/850 (Hz) 170Hz
MODE-RTTY 098 RTTY MARK FREQ 1275/2125 (Hz) 2125Hz
MODE-SSB 099 SSB LCUT FREQ OFF/100
ȡ
1000 (50Hz/step) 200Hz
MODE-SSB 100 SSB LCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 6dB/oct
MODE-SSB 101 SSB HCUT FREQ 700
ȡ
4000 (50Hz/step) / OFF 3000Hz
MODE-SSB 102 SSB HCUT SLOPE 6dB/oct / 18dB/oct 18dB/oct
MODE-SSB 103 SSB MIC SEL FRONT/DATA FRONT
MODE-SSB 104 SSB TX BPF 100-3000Hz/100-2900Hz/200-2800Hz/ 300-2700Hz
300-2700Hz/400-2600Hz/3000WB
MODE-SSB 105 LSB RX CARRIER -200
ȡ
0
ȡ
+200 (10Hz/step) 0Hz
MODE-SSB 106 USB RX CARRIER -200
ȡ
0
ȡ
+200 (10Hz/step) 0Hz
MENU MODE
Page 110 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
Group No. Menu Function Available Values Default Setting
RX DSP 107 APF WIDTH NARROW/MEDIUM/WIDE MEDIUM
RX DSP 108 CONTOUR LEVEL -40
ȡ
0
ȡ
20 -15
RX DSP 109 CONTOUR WIDTH 1
ȡ
11 10
RX DSP 110 DNR LEVEL 1 - 15 3
RX DSP 111 IF NOTCH WIDTH NARROW/WIDE WIDE
RX DSP 112 HF
CW SHAPE SOFT/SHARP SOFT
RX DSP 113 HF CW SLOPE STEEP/MEDIUM/GENTLE MEDIUM
RX DSP 114 6M CW SHAPE SOFT/SHARP SOFT
RX DSP 115 6M CW SLOPE STEEP/MEDIUM/GENTLE MEDIUM
RX DSP 116 HF PSK SHAPE SOFT/SHARP SHARP
RX DSP 117 HF PSK SLOPE STEEP/MEDIUM/GENTLE MEDIUM
RX DSP 118 HF FSK SHAPE SOFT/SHARP SHARP
RX DSP 119 HF FSK SLOPE STEEP/MEDIUM/GENTLE MEDIUM
RX DSP 120 HF SSB SHAPE SOFT/SHARP SHARP
RX DSP 121 HF SSB SLOPE STEEP/MEDIUM/GENTLE MEDIUM
RX DSP 122 6M SSB SHAPE SOFT/SHARP SOFT
RX DSP 123 6M SSB SLOPE STEEP/MEDIUM/GENTLE MEDIUM
SCOPE 124 SCOPE MODE CENTER/FIX CENTER
SCOPE 125 SCOPE SPEED FAST/SLOW FAST
SCOPE 126 SCOPE AUTO TIME OFF/3/5/10/30/60 (sec) OFF
SCOPE 127 START DIAL SPEED 0.5/1/2/4/8/16 (kHz/sec) 8kHz/sec
SCOPE 128 CENTER SPAN FREQ 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 100kHz
SCOPE 129 FIX 1.8MHz 1800
ȡ
1999 (1kHz/step) 1800kHz
SCOPE 130 FIX 1.8MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 200kHz
SCOPE 131 FIX 3.5MHz 3500
ȡ
3999 (1kHz/step) 3500kHz
SCOPE 132 FIX 3.5MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 500kHz
SCOPE 133 FIX 5.0MHz 5250
ȡ
5499 (1kHz/step) 5250kHz
SCOPE 134 FIX 5.0MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 200kHz
SCOPE 135 FIX 7.0MHz 7000
ȡ
7299 (1kHz/step) 7000kHz
SCOPE 136 FIX 7.0MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 500kHz
SCOPE 137 FIX 10MHz 10100
ȡ
10149 (1kHz/step) 10100kHz
SCOPE 138 FIX 10MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 50kHz
SCOPE 139 FIX 14MHz 14000
ȡ
14349 (1kHz/step) 14000kHz
SCOPE 140 FIX 14MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 500kHz
SCOPE 141 FIX 18MHz 18000
ȡ
18199 (1kHz/step) 18068kHz
SCOPE 142 FIX 18MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 100kHz
SCOPE 143 FIX 21MHz 21000
ȡ
21449 (1kHz/step) 21000kHz
SCOPE 144 FIX 21MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 500kHz
SCOPE 145 FIX 24MHz 24800
ȡ
24989 (1kHz/step) 24890kHz
SCOPE 146 FIX 24MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 100kHz
SCOPE 147 FIX 28MHz 28000
ȡ
29699 (1kHz/step) 28000kHz
SCOPE 148 FIX 28MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 1000kHz
SCOPE 149 FIX 50MHz 50000
ȡ
53999 (1kHz/step) 50000kHz
SCOPE 150 FIX 50MHz SPAN 20/50/100/200/500/1000 (kHz) 1000kHz
TUNING 151 CW DIAL STEP 1/5/10 (Hz) 10Hz
TUNING 152 DATA DIAL STEP 1/5/10 (Hz) 5Hz
TUNING 153 AM/FM DIAL STEP 10/100 (Hz) 100Hz
TUNING 154 RTTY DIAL STEP 1/5/10 (Hz) 5Hz
TUNING 155 SSB DIAL STEP 1/5/10 (Hz) 10Hz
TUNING 156 AM CH STEP 2.5/5/9/10/12.5 (kHz) 5kHz
TUNING 157 FM CH STEP 5/6.25/10/12.5/20/25 (kHz) 5kHz
TUNING 158 1MHz/100kHz SELECT 1MHz/100kHz 1MHz
TX AUDIO 159 PRMTRC EQ1 FREQ 100/200/300/400/500/600/700 200
TX AUDIO 160 PRMTRC EQ1 LEVEL -20
ȡ
0
ȡ
+10 0
TX AUDIO 161 PRMTRC EQ1 BWTH 1
ȡ
10 1
MENU MODE
Page 111FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
Group No. Menu Function Available Values Default Setting
TX AUDIO 162 PRMTRC EQ2 FREQ 700
ȡ
1500 (100 Hz/step) 800
TX AUDIO 163 PRMTRC EQ2 LEVEL -20
ȡ
0
ȡ
+10 0
TX AUDIO 164 PRMTRC EQ2 BWTH 1
ȡ
10 1
TX AUDIO 165 PRMTRC EQ3 FREQ 1500
ȡ
3200 (100 Hz/step) 2100
TX AUDIO 166 PRMTRC EQ3 LEVEL -20
ȡ
0
ȡ
+10 5
TX AUDIO 167 PRMTRC EQ3 BWTH 1
ȡ
10 1
TX AUDIO 168 P-PRMTRC EQ1 FREQ 100
ȡ
700 (100 Hz/step) 200
TX AUDIO 169 P-PRMTRC EQ1 LEVEL -20
ȡ
0
ȡ
+10 -3
TX AUDIO 170 P-PRMTRC EQ1 BWTH 1
ȡ
10 2
TX AUDIO 171 P-PRMTRC EQ2 FREQ 700
ȡ
1500 (100 Hz/step) 800
TX AUDIO 172 P-PRMTRC EQ2 LEVEL -20
ȡ
0
ȡ
+10 0
TX AUDIO 173 P-PRMTRC EQ2 BWTH 1
ȡ
10 1
TX AUDIO 174 P-PRMTRC EQ3 FREQ 1500
ȡ
3200 (100 Hz/step) 2100
TX AUDIO 175 P-PRMTRC EQ3 LEVEL -20
ȡ
0
ȡ
+10 5
TX AUDIO 176 P-PRMTRC EQ3 BWTH 1
ȡ
10 1
TX GNRL 177 TX MAX POWER 5
ȡ
100 100
TX GNRL 178 EXT AMP TUNING PWR 10/20/50/100 100W
TX GNRL 179 TUNER SELECT INTERNAL/EXTERNAL INTERNAL
TX GNRL 180 VOX SELECT MIC/DATA MIC
TX GNRL 181 VOX GAIN 0
ȡ
100 50
TX GNRL 182 VOX DELAY 30
ȡ
3000 (msec) 500msec
TX GNRL 183 ANTI VOX GAIN 0
ȡ
100 50
TX GNRL 184 EMERGENCY FREQ TX ENABLE/DISABLE DISABLE
AF SCOPE 185 FFT DISPLAY MODE SPECTRUM/WATER FALL SPECTRUM
AF SCOPE 186 FFT ATT 0/10/20 (dB) 10dB
DEC CW
187 CW DECODE BW 25/50/100/250 (Hz) 100Hz
E/D RTTY
188 RX USOS ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE
E/D RTTY
189 TX USOS ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE
E/D RTTY
190 RX NEW LINE CODE CR,LF,CR+LF/CR+LF
CR,LF,CR+LF
E/D RTTY
191 TX AUTO CR+LF ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE
E/D RTTY
192 TX DIDDLE OFF/BLANK/LTRS BLANK
E/D RTTY
193 BAUDOT CODE CCITT/US US
E/D PSK
194 PSK MODE BPSK/QPSK BPSK
E/D PSK
195 DECODE AFC RANGE 8/15/30 (Hz) 15Hz
E/D PSK
196 QPSK POLARITY REV RX-N,TX-N / RX-R,TX-N / RX-N,TX-R RX-N,TX-N
RX-R,TX-R
MENU MODE
Page 112 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
AGC GROUP
001 FAST DELAY
Function Sets the delay time for the $GC F$ST mode.
$vailable Values 0 a 4000 msec 0 msecstep)
'efault Setting 00 msec
002 MID DELAY
Function Sets the delay time for the $GC 0I' mode.
$vailable Values 0 a 4000 msec 0 msecstep)
'efault Setting 1000 msec
003 SLOW DELAY
Function Sets the delay time for the $GC SL2W mode.
$vailable Values 0 a 4000 msec 0 msecstep)
'efault Setting 4000 msec
004 AGC SLOPE
Function Select the gain curve of the $GC ampli¿er.
$vailable Values 1250$LSL23(
'efault Setting 1250$L
1250$L The $GC output level will follow a linear
response to the antenna input level, while
$GC is activated.
SL23( The $GC output level will increase at 110
the rate of the antenna input level, while
$GC is activated.
008 TFT LAYOUT
Function Set the positions of the freTuency display and
meter display.
$vailable Values TY3(1 TY3(
'efault Setting TY3(1
TY3(1 'isplays the freTuency display at the top of
the TFT display.
TY3( 'isplays the freTuency display below the S
32 meter and the 'S3 display.
009 DIMMER LED
Function Sets the indicator illumination level.
$vailable Values 1
'efault Setting
$djusts the illumination level of the indicator located
on the above of the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob. You may
observe the effects of the changes as you adjust the
level setting. The higher the setting, the brighter the
illumination becomes.
010 DIMMER TFT
Function Setting of the TFT display brightness level.
$vailable Values 0 a 1
'efault Setting 8
011 BAR DISPLAY SELECT
Function Selects one of three parameters to be viewed
on the Tuning 2ffset Indicator.
$vailable Values CL$5CW TU1(uTU1(
'efault Setting CW TU1(
CL$5 'isplays relative clari¿er offset.
CW TU1( 'isplays relative tuning offset between the
incoming signal and transmitted freTuency
while in CW operation.
uTU1( 'isplays the peak position of the optional
u
-TU1( ¿lter.
012 METER TYPE SELECT
Function Selects the meter display type.
$vailable Values $1$L2GB$5
'efault Setting $1$L2G
$1$L2G 'isplays relative clari¿er offset.
B$5 'isplays relative tuning offset between the
incoming signal and transmitted freTuency
while in CW operation.
013 BAR MTR PEAK HOLD
Function Selects the peak hold time of the B$5 meter.
$vailable Values 2FF0.1.0.0 sec
'efault Setting 2FF
014 ROTATOR START UP
Function Selects the starting point of your rotator
controller's indicator needle.
$vailable Values 0018070
'efault Setting 0
$dvice If the optional $ntenna 5otator is not
connected, this adjustment has no effect.
DISPLAY GROUP
005 MY CALL
Function 3rograms your Call Sign.
$vailable Values 0ax 1 characters
'efault Setting FT';100
006 MY CALL TIME
Function 3rograms the display period of your Call Sign.
$vailable Values 2FF a sec
'efault Setting 1 sec
007 VFO COLOR
Function Selects the VF2-$ freTuency background
color.
$vailable Values BLU( S.Y BLU ( G5((1
3U53L( 5(' 25$1G( G5$Y BL$C.
'efault Setting BLU(
MENU MODE
AGC start
Page 113FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
015 ROTATOR OFFSET ADJ
Function $djusts the indicator needle precisely to the
starting point set in menu item “
014 ROTATOR START
UP
”
.
$vailable Values -30 a 0 step)
'efault Setting 0
$dvice If the optional $ntenna 5otator is not
connected, this adjustment has no effect.
DVS GROUP
016 RX OUT LEVEL
Function Sets the audio output level from the optional
'VS-6 Voice 0emory Unit.
$vailable Values 0 a 100
'efault 0
$dvice
If the optional 'VS-6 Voice 0emory Unit is not
connected, this adjustment has no effect.
017 TX OUT LVL
Function Sets the microphone input level to the optional
'VS-6 Voice 0emory Unit
$vailable Values 0 a 100
'efault 0
$dvice
If the optional 'VS-6 Voice 0emory Unit is not
connected, this adjustment has no effect.
KEYER GROUP
018 F KEYER TYPE
Function Selects the desired keyer operation mode for
the device connected to the front panel .(Y jack.
$vailable Values 2FFBUG(L(.(Y$CS
'efault Setting (L(.(Y
2FF 'isables the front panel keyer “straight
key” mode for use with external keyer or
computer-driven keying interface).
BUG 0echanical “bug” keyer emulation. 2ne
paddle produces “dits” automatically, while
the other paddle manually produces “dahs”.
(L(.(Y Iambic keyer with $CS $utomatic Character
Spacing) disabled.
$CS Iambic keyer with $CS $utomatic Character
Spacing) enabled.
019 F CW KEYER
Function Selects the keyer paddle wiring con¿guration
for the .(Y jack on the front panel.
$vailable Values 1255(V
'efault Setting 125
125 Tip 'ot, 5ing 'ash, Shaft Ground
5(V Tip 'ash, 5ing 'ot, Shaft Ground
020 R KEYER TYPE
Function Selects the desired keyer operation mode for
the device connected to the rear panel .(Y jack.
$vailable Values 2FFBUG(L(.(Y$CS
'efault Setting (L(.(Y
2FF 'isables the rear panel keyer “straight
key” mode for use with external keyer or
computer-driven keying interface).
BUG 0echanical “bug” keyer emulation. 2ne
paddle produces “dits” automatically, while
the other paddle manually produces “dahs”.
(L(.(Y Iambic keyer with $CS $utomatic Character
Spacing) disabled.
$CS Iambic keyer with $CS $utomatic Character
Spacing) enabled.
021 R CW KEYER
Function Selects the keyer paddle wiring con¿guration
for the .(Y jack on the rear panel.
$vailable Values 1255(V
'efault Setting 125
125 Tip 'ot, 5ing 'ash, Shaft Ground
5(V Tip 'ash, 5ing 'ot, Shaft Ground
022 ELEKEY TYPE
Function Selects the operation mode of the internal
keyer.
$vailable Values (L(.(Y-$(L(.(Y-B
'efault Setting (L(.(Y-B
023 CW WEIGHT
Function Sets the 'ot'ash ratio for the built-in
electronic keyer.
$vailable Values 1) . a 4.
'efault Setting 3.0
024 BEACON TIME
Function Sets the interval time between repeats of the
beacon message.
$vailable Values 2FF1 a 40 sec 1 secstep)70 a
60 sec 30 secstep)
'efault Setting 2FF
MENU MODE
Page 114 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
025 NUMBER STYLE
Function Selects the Contest 1umber “Cut” format for
an imbedded contest number.
$vailable Values 10$U12$U1T$12
$1T11211T
'efault Setting 10
10 'oes not abbreviate the Contest 1umber
$U12 $bbreviates to “$”
for “2ne”, “U” for “Two”,
“1” for “1ine”, and “2” for “Zero”.
$U1T $bbreviates to “$”
for “2ne”, “U” for “Two”,
“1” for “1ine”, and “T” for “Zero”.
$12 $bbreviates to “$”
for “2ne”, “1” for “1ine”,
and “2” for “Zero”.
$1T $
bbreviates to “$”
for “2ne”, “1” for “1ine”,
and “T” for “Zero”.
112 $bbreviates to “1” for “1ine”, and “2” for
“Zero”.
11T $bbreviates to “1” for “1ine”, and “T” for
“Zero”.
026 CONTEST NUMBER
Function (nters the initial contest number that will
incrementdecrement after sending during contest QS2s.
$vailable Values 0 a 
'efault Setting 1
027 CW MEMORY 1
Function 3ermits entry of the CW message for message
register 1.
$vailable Values T(;T0(SS$G(
'efault Setting 0(SS$G(
T(;T You may enter the CW message from the
FH-.
0(SS$G( You may enter the CW message from the
CW keyer.
028 CW MEMORY 2
Function 3ermits entry of the CW message for message
register .
$vailable Values T(;T0(SS$G(
'efault Setting 0(SS$G(
T(;T You may enter the CW message from the
FH-.
0(SS$G( You may enter the CW message from the
CW keyer.
029 CW MEMORY 3
Function 3ermits entry of the CW message for message
register 3.
$vailable Values T(;T0(SS$G(
'efault Setting 0(SS$G(
T(;T You may enter the CW message from the
FH-.
0(SS$G( You may enter the CW message from the
CW keyer.
030 CW MEMORY 4
Function 3ermits entry of the CW message for message
register 4.
$vailable Values T(;T0(SS$G(
'efault Setting T(;T
T(;T You may enter the CW message from the
FH-.
0(SS$G( You may enter the CW message from the
CW keyer.
031 CW MEMORY 5
Function 3ermits entry of the CW message for message
register .
$vailable Values T(;T0(SS$G(
'efault Setting T(;T
T(;T You may enter the CW message from the
FH-.
0(SS$G( You may enter the CW message from the
CW keyer.
GENERAL GROUP
032 ANT SELECT
Function Sets the method of antenna selection.
$vailable Values B$1'ST$C.
'efault Setting B$1'
B$1' The antenna is selected in accordance with the
operating band.
ST$C. The antenna is selected in accordance with the
band stack different antennas may be utili]ed
on the same band, if so selected in the band
stack).
033 ANT2 SETTING
Function Selects the operation mode of the $1T
connector.
$vailable Values T5; 51
'efault Setting T5;
T5; $1T used for T; and 5;
51 $1T used for 5; only
034 NB LEVEL
Function $djusts the noise blanking level of the IF
1oise Blanker for short duration pulse noise.
$vailable Values 0 a 100
'efault Setting 0
035 BEEP LEVEL
Function Sets the beep level.
$vailable Values 0 a 100
'efault Setting 0
036 MONITOR LEVEL
Function Sets the 0onitor level.
$vailable Values 0 a 100
'efault Setting 0
MENU MODE
Page 115FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
037 MOX
Function (nablesdisables the 02; operation.
$vailable Values (1$BL('IS$BL(
'efault Setting (1$BL(
038 RF SQL VR
Function Selects the operation mode of the 5FSQL
knob.
$vailable Values 5FSQL
'efault Setting 5F
039 CAT RATE
Function Sets the transceiver computer-interface
circuitry for the C$T baud rate to be used.
$vailable Values 480060010038400 bps
'efault Setting 4800 bps
040 CAT TIME OUT TIMER
Function Sets the Time-2ut Timer countdown time for
a C$T command input.
$vailable Values 1010010003000 msec
'efault Setting 10 msec
The Time-2ut Timer shuts off the C$T data input after a
continuous transmission of the programmed time.
041 CAT RTS
Function (nables'isables the 5TS port of the C$T
jack.
$vailable Values (1$BL('IS$BL(
'efault Setting (1$BL(
042 MEM GRP
Function (nables'isables 0emory Group 2peration.
$vailable Values (1$BL('IS$BL(
'efault Setting 'IS$BL(
043 QUICK SPLIT FREQ
Function Selects the tuning offset for the Quick Split
feature.
$vailable Values -0 a 0 a 0 kH] 1 kH] Step)
'efault Setting  kH]
044 TXW DIAL SELECT
Function Selects the knob for tuning of the T;W
freTuency during S3LIT operation.
$vailable Values VF2-$VF2-B
'efault Setting VF2-B
VF2-$ The T; freTuency is tuned with the 0ain
Tuning 'ial knob.
VF2-B The T; freTuency is tuned with the [VF2-B
CL$5] knob.
045 TX TIME OUT TIMER
Function Sets the Time-2ut Timer countdown time.
$vailable Values 2FF1 a 30 min
'efault Setting 2FF
The Time-2ut Timer shuts off the transmitter after
continuous transmission of the programmed time.
046 uTUNE DIAL STEP
Function Selects the
µ
-TU1( mode.
$vailable Values 'I$L ST(3-1'I$L ST(3-
'efault Setting 'I$L ST(3-1
'I$L ST(3-1 $ctivates the
µ
-TU1( system using
“C2$5S(” steps of the [VF2-BCL$5]
knob  stepsclick) on the 7 0H] and
lower amateur bands. 2n the 1014 0H]
bands, “FI1(” [VF2-BCL$5] knob
steps will be used 1 stepclick).
'I$L ST(3- $ctivates the
µ
-TU1( system using
“FI1(” steps of the [VF2-BCL$5]
knob 1 stepclick) on the 14 0H] and
lower amateur bands.
$dvice If an optional 5F
µ
Tuning .it is not connected,
this adjustment has no effect.
047 MIC SCAN
Function (nablesdisables scanning access via the
microphone [U3]['W1] keys.
$vailable Values (1$BL('IS$BL(
'efault Setting (1$BL(
048 MIC SCAN RESUME
Function Selects the Scan 5esume mode.
$vailable Values 3$US(TI0(
'efault Setting TI0(
3$US( The scanner will hold until the signal
disappears, then will resume after one second.
TI0( The scanner will hold for five seconds, then
resume whether or not the other station is still
transmitting.
049 FREQ ADJ
Function $djusts the reference oscillator.
$vailable Values
-
 a 0 a 
'efault Setting 0
To calibrate the freTuency of your radio, you will need
a freTuency counter or set your receiver to one of the
time standard freTuencies such as WWV or WWVH.
The following example describes a calibration method
while receiving the WWVH time standard freTuency in
Hawaii.
1. Turn off both 5; CL$5 and T; CL$5 function,
before adjustment.
. Tune the radio to 1,000.00 0H] with CW-USB
mode, then adjust the $F knob to comfortable
listening level.
3. (nter Set 0enu Item “
049 FREQ ADJ
”, and then
adjust the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob so that the B$5
display is illumination in the center on the meter.
MENU MODE
Page 116 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
MODE-AM GROUP
050 AM LCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the lower side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the $0 mode.
$vailable Values 2FF100 a 1000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 2FF
051 AM LCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the lower side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the $0 mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 6dBoct
052 AM HCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the upper side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the $0 mode.
$vailable Values 2FF700 a 4000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 2FF
053 AM HCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the upper side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the $0 mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 6dBoct
054 AM MIC GAIN
Function Sets the microphone gain for the $0 mode.
$vailable Values 0VC50 a 100
'efault Setting 30
When this menu is set to “0CV5”, you may adjust the
microphone gain using the front panel [0ICS3((']
knob.
055 AM MIC SEL
Function Selects the microphone to be used in the $0
mode.
$vailable Values F521T '$T$
'efault Setting F521T
F521T Selects the microphone connected to the
front panel 0IC jack while using the $0
mode.
'$T$ Selects the microphone connected to pin 1 of
the 3$C.(T -ack while using the $0 mode.
MODE-CW GROUP
056 CW PITCH
Function $djusts your preferred CW tone pitch.
$vailable Values 300 a 100 H] 10 H]step)
'efault Setting 700 H]
057 CW LCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the lower side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the CW mode.
$vailable Values 2FF100 a 1000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 0
058 CW LCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the lower side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the CW mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 18dBoct
059 CW HCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the upper side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the CW mode.
$vailable Values 2FF700 a 4000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 100
060 CW HCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the upper side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the CW mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 18dBoct
061 CW AUTO MODE
Function (nablesdisables CW keying while operating
on SSB.
$vailable Values 2FF0021
'efault Setting 2FF
2FF 'isables CW keying while operating on SSB.
0 (nables CW keying only while operating SSB on
0 0H] but not HF).
2n (nables CW keying while operating on SSB all
T; bands).
062 CW BFO
Function Sets the CW carrier oscillator injection side
for the CW mode.
$vailable Values USBLSB$UT2
'efault Setting USB
USB Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the USB
side.
LSB Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the LSB
side.
$UT2 Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the LSB
side while operating on the 7 0H] band and
below, and the USB side while operating on the
10 0H] band and up.
MENU MODE
Page 117FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
063 CW BK-IN
Function Sets the CW “break-in” mode.
$vailable Values S(0IFULL
'efault Setting S(0I
S(0I The transceiver will operate in the semi break-in
mode. The delay receiver recovery) time is set
via the 0enu item “
064 CW BK-IN DELAY
”.
FULL The transceiver will operate in the full break-in
QS.) mode.
064 CW BK-IN DELAY
Function $djusts the .eying 'elay receiver recovery)
time on the CW mode.
$vailable Values 30 a 3000 msec 10 msecstep)
'efault Setting 00 msec
065 CW WAVE SHAPE
Function Selects the CW carrier wave-form shape rise
fall times).
$vailable Values 146 msec
'efault Setting 4 msec
066 CW FREQ DISPLAY
Function Selects the freTuency 'isplay Format for the
CW mode.
$vailable Values 'I5(CT F5(Q3ITCH 2FFS(T
'efault Setting 3ITCH 2FFS(T
'I5(CT F5(Q ' isplays the receiver carrier
freTuency, without any offset added.
When changing modes between
SSB and CW, the freTuency display
remains constant.
3ITCH 2FFS(T This freTuency display reflects the
added BF2 offset.
067 PC KEYING
Function (nablesdisables CW keying from the “'$T$
5TTY” terminal pin 3) of the 5TTY'$T$ jack on the
rear panel, while operating on the CW mode.
$vailable Values 2FF21
'efault Setting 2FF
068 QSK
Function Selects the time delay between when the
3TT is keyed and the carrier is transmitted during QS.
operation when using the internal keyer.
$vailable Values 1030 msec
'efault Setting 1 msec
MODE-DATA GROUP
069 DATA MODE
Function Selects the operation mode of the '$T$
mode.
$vailable Values 3S.2TH(5
'efault Setting 3S.
070 PSK TONE
Function Selects the 3S. tone freTuency.
$vailable Values 1000100000 H]
'efault Setting 1000 H]
071 OTHER DISP (SSB)
Function Sets the packet freTuency display offset.
$vailable Values -3000 a 0 a 3000 H] 10 H]step)
'efault 0 H]
072 OTHER SHIFT (SSB)
Function Sets the carrier point during the SSB packet
operation.
$vailable Values -3000 a 0 a 3000 H] 10 H]step)
'efault 1000 H] typical center freTuency for 3S.31,
etc.)
073 DATA LCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the lower side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the '$T$ mode.
$vailable Values 2FF100 a 1000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 300
074 DATA LCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the lower side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the '$T$ mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 18dBoct
075 DATA HCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the upper side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the '$T$ mode.
$vailable Values 2FF700 a 4000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 3000
076 DATA HCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the upper side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the '$T$ mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 18dBoct
MENU MODE
Page 118 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
077 DATA MIC GAIN
Function Sets the data input level from the T1C to the
$FS. modulator.
$vailable Values 0CV50 a 100
'efault Setting 0CV5
When this menu is set to “0CV5”, you may adjust the
microphone gain using the front panel [0ICS3((']
knob.
078 DATA OUT LEVEL
Function Sets the $FS. data output level at the output
port pin ) of the 5TTY3.T jack.
$vailable Values 0 a 100
'efault Setting 0
079 DATA VOX GAIN
Function $djusts the “V2;” Gain in the '$T$ mode.
$vailable Values 0 a 100
'efault Setting 0
080 DATA VOX DELEY
Function $djusts the “V2;” 'elay receiver recovery)
time in the '$T$ mode.
$vailable Values 30 a 3000 msec 10 msecstep)
'efault Setting 300 msec
MODE-FM GROUP
081 FM LCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the lower side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the F0 mode.
$vailable Values 2FF100 a 1000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 0
082 FM LCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the lower side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the F0 mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 18dBoct
083 FM HCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the upper side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the F0 mode.
$vailable Values 2FF700 a 4000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 2FF
084 FM HCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the upper side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the F0 mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 6dBoct
085 FM MIC GAIN
Function Sets the microphone gain for the F0 mode.
$vailable Values 0CV50 a 100
'efault Setting 0CV5
When this menu is set to “0CV5”, you may adjust the
microphone gain using the front panel [0ICS3((']
knob.
086 FM MIC SEL
Function Selects the microphone to be used on the F0
mode.
$vailable Values F521T '$T$
'efault Setting F521T
F521T Selects the microphone connected to the front
panel 0IC jack while using the F0 mode.
'$T$ Selects the microphone connected to pin 1 of
the 3$C.(T -ack while using the F0 mode.
087 RPT SHIFT (28MHz)
Function Sets the magnitude of the repeater shift on the
8 0H] band.
$vailable Values 0 a 1000 kH] 10 kH]step)
'efault Setting 100 kH]
088 RPT SHIFT (50MHz)
Function Sets the magnitude of the repeater shift on the
0 0H] band.
$vailable Values 0 a 4000 kH] 10 kH]step)
'efault Setting 1000 kH]
089 TONE FREQ
Function Select the desired CTCSS Tone. $ total of 0
standard CTCSS tones are provided see the CTCSS
Tone Chart on 3age 1).
$vailable Values 67.0 a 4.1 H]
'efault Setting 67.0 H]
MENU MODE
Page 119FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
MODE-RTTY GROUP
090 RTTY LCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the lower side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the 5TTY mode.
$vailable Values 2FF100 a 1000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 300
091 RTTY LCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the lower side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the 5TTY mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 18dBoct
092 RTTY HCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the upper side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the 5TTY mode.
$vailable Values 2FF700 a 4000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 3000
093 RTTY HCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the upper side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the 5TTY mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 18dBoct
094 POLARITY-R
Function Selects normal or reverse 0arkSpace polarity
for 5TTY receive operation.
$vailable Values 1255(V
'efault Setting 125
095 POLARITY-T
Function Selects normal or reverse 0arkSpace polarity
for 5TTY transmit operation.
$vailable Values 1255(V
'efault Setting 125
096 RTTY OUT LEVEL
Function Sets the 5TTY $FS.) data output level at
the output port pin ) of the 5TTY3.T jack.
$vailable Values 0 a 100
'efault Setting 0
097 RTTY SHIFT
Function Selects the freTuency shift for 5TTY $FS.)
operation.
$vailable Values17000480 H]
'efault Setting 170 H]
098 RTTY MARK FREQ
Function Selects the 0ark tone for 5TTY operation.
$vailable Values 171 H]
'efault Setting 1 H]
MODE-SSB GROUP
099 SSB LCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the lower side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the SSB mode.
$vailable Values 2FF100 a 1000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 00
100 SSB LCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the lower side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the SSB mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 6dBoct
101 SSB HCUT FREQ
Function Selects the cutoff freTuency of the upper side
of the 5; audio ¿lter in the SSB mode.
$vailable Values 2FF700 a 4000 H] 0 H]step)
'efault Setting 3000
102 SSB HCUT SLOPE
Function Selects the ¿lter slope of the upper side of the
5; audio ¿lter in the 5TTY mode.
$vailable Values 6dBoct 18dBoct
'efault Setting 18dBoct
103 SSB MIC SEL
Function Selects the microphone to be used on the SSB
mode.
$vailable Values F521T '$T$
'efault Setting F521T
F521T Selects the microphone connected to the front
panel 0IC jack while using the SSB mode.
'$T$ Selects the microphone connected to pin 1 of
the 3$C.(T -ack while using the SSB mode.
104 SSB TX BPF
Function Selects the audio passband of the 'S3
modulator on the SSB mode.
$vailable Values 100-3000100-0000-800300-
700400-6003000WB
'efault Setting 300 a 700 H])
105 LSB RX CARRIER
Function $djusts the receiver carrier point for the LSB
mode.
$vailable Values -00 H] a 0 a 00 H] 10 H] steps)
'efault Setting 0
106 USB RX CARRIER
Function $djusts the receiver carrier point for the USB
mode.
$vailable Values -00 H] a 0 a 00 H] 10 H] steps)
'efault Setting 0
MENU MODE
Page 120 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
RX DSP GROUP
107 APF WIDTH
Function Selects the Bandwidth of the $udio 3eak
Filter.
$vailable Values 1$552W0('IU0WI'(
'efault Setting 0('IU0
108 CONTOUR LEVEL
Function $djusts the gain of the Contour ¿lter.
$vailable Values -40 a 0 a 0 dB
'efault Setting -1
109 CONTOUR WIDTH
Function $djusts the Q-factor of the Contour ¿lter.
$vailable Values 1 a 11
'efault Setting 10
110 DNR LEVEL
Function Set the 'igital 1oise 5eduction response.
$vailable Values 1 a 1
'efault Setting 3
111 IF NOTCH WIDTH
Function Selects the bandwidth of the 'S3 12TCH
¿lter.
$vailable Values 1$552W WI'(
'efault Setting WI'(
112 HF CW SHAPE
Function Selects the passband characteristics of the
'S3 ¿lter for the CW mode on the HF band.
$vailable Values S2FT SH$53
'efault Setting S2FT
S2FT 3rimary importance is attached to the phase of
the ¿lter factor.
SH$53 3rimary importance is attached to the
amplitude of the ¿lter factor.
113 HF CW SLOPE
Function Selects the shape factor of the 'S3 ¿lter for
the CW mode on the HF band.
$vailable Values ST((3 0('IU0 G(1TL(
'efault Setting 0('IU0
114 6M CW SHAPE
Function Selects the passband characteristics of the
'S3 ¿lter for the CW mode on the 0 0H] band.
$vailable Values S2FT SH$53
'efault Setting S2FT
S2FT 3rimary importance is attached to the phase of
the ¿lter factor.
SH$53 3rimary importance is attached to the
amplitude of the ¿lter factor.
115 6M CW SLOPE
Function Selects the shape factor of the 'S3 ¿lter for
the CW mode on the 0 0H] band.
$vailable Values ST((3 0('IU0 G(1TL(
'efault Setting 0('IU0
116 HF PSK SHAPE
Function Selects the passband characteristics of the
'S3 ¿lter for the 3S. mode on the HF band.
$vailable Values S2FT SH$53
'efault Setting SH$53
S2FT 3rimary importance is attached to the phase of
the ¿lter factor.
SH$53 3rimary importance is attached to the
amplitude of the ¿lter factor.
117 HF PSK SLOPE
Function Selects the shape factor of the 'S3 ¿lter for
the 3S. mode on the HF band.
$vailable Values ST((3 0('IU0 G(1TL(
'efault Setting 0('IU0
118 HF FSK SHAPE
Function Selects the passband characteristics of the
'S3 ¿lter for the FS. mode on the HF band.
$vailable Values S2FT SH$53
'efault Setting SH$53
S2FT 3rimary importance is attached to the phase of
the ¿lter factor.
SH$53 3rimary importance is attached to the
amplitude of the ¿lter factor.
119 HF FSK SLOPE
Function Selects the shape factor of the 'S3 ¿lter for
the 3S. mode on the HF band.
$vailable Values ST((3 0('IU0 G(1TL(
'efault Setting 0('IU0
MENU MODE
Page 121FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
120 HF SSB SHAPE
Function Selects the passband characteristics of the
'S3 ¿lter for the SSB mode on the HF band.
$vailable Values S2FT SH$53
'efault Setting SH$53
S2FT 3rimary importance is attached to the phase of
the ¿lter factor.
SH$53 3rimary importance is attached to the
amplitude of the ¿lter factor.
121 HF SSB SLOPE
Function Selects the shape factor of the 'S3 ¿lter for
the SSB mode on the HF band.
$vailable Values ST((3 0('IU0 G(1TL(
'efault Setting 0('IU0
122 6M SSB SHAPE
Function Selects the passband characteristics of the
'S3 ¿lter for the SSB mode on the 0 0H] band.
$vailable Values S2FT SH$53
'efault Setting S2FT
S2FT 3rimary importance is attached to the phase of
the ¿lter factor.
SH$53 3rimary importance is attached to the
amplitude of the ¿lter factor.
123 6M SSB SLOPE
Function Selects the shape factor of the 'S3 ¿lter for
the SSB mode on the 0 0H] band.
$vailable Values ST((3 0('IU0 G(1TL(
'efault Setting 0('IU0
SCOPE GROUP
124 SCOPE MODE
Function Selects the operation mode of the Band Scope
0onitor C(1T(5 mode or FI; mode).
$vailable Values C(1T(5 FI;
'efault Setting C(1T(5
125 SCOPE SPEED
Function Selects the Sweep Speed of the Band Scope
0onitor.
$vailable Values F$ST SL2W
'efault Setting F$ST
126 SCOPE AUTO TIME
Function Selects the Start cycle of the $uto Scope
feature.
$vailable Values 2FF 3 10 30 60 sec
'efault Setting 2FF
127 START DIAL SPEED
Function Selects the start condition of the 'ial $uto
Scope feature.
$vailable Values 0. 1 4 8 16 kH]sec
'efault Setting 8 kH]sec
128 CENTER SPAN FREQ
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the
C(1T(5 mode Spectrum Scope.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 100 kH]
129 FIX 1.8MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 160 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 1800 a 1 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 1800 kH]
130 FIX 1.8MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 160 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 00 kH]
131 FIX 3.5MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 80 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 300 a 3 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 300 kH]
MENU MODE
Page 122 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
132 FIX 3.5MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 80 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 00 kH]
133 FIX 5.0MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 60 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 a 4 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 0 kH]
134 FIX 5.0MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 60 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 00 kH]
135 FIX 7.0MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 40 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 7000 a 7 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 7000 kH]
136 FIX 7.0MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 40 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 00 kH]
137 FIX 10MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 30 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 10100 a 1014 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 10100 kH]
138 FIX 10MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 30 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 0 kH]
139 FIX 14MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 0 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 14000 a 1434 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 14000 kH]
140 FIX 14MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 0 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 00 kH]
141 FIX 18MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 17 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 18000 a 181 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 18068 kH]
142 FIX 18MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 17 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 100 kH]
143 FIX 21MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 1 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 1000 a 144 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 1000 kH]
144 FIX 21MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 1 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 00 kH]
145 FIX 24MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 1 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 4800 - 48 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 480 kH]
146 FIX 24MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 1 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 100 kH]
147 FIX 28MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 10 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 8000 a 6 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 8000 kH]
MENU MODE
Page 123FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
148 FIX 28MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 10 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 1000 kH]
149 FIX 50MHz
Function Selects the scan start freTuency of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 6 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0000 a 3 kH] 1 kH] steps)
'efault Setting 0000 kH]
150 FIX 50MHz SPAN
Function Selects the desired freTuency span of the FI;
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 6 m
amateur band.
$vailable Values 0 0 100 00 00 1000 kH]
'efault Setting 1000 kH]
TUNING GROUP
151 CW DIAL STEP
Function Setting of the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob and the
[VF2-BCL$5] knob tuning speed in the CW mode.
$vailable Values 110 H]
'efault Setting 10 H]
152 DATA DIAL STEP
Function Setting of the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob and the
[VF2-BCL$5] knob tuning speed in the '$T$ mode.
$vailable Values 110 H]
'efault Setting 10 H]
153 AM/FM DIAL STEP
Function Setting of the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob and the
[VF2-BCL$5] knob tuning speed in the $0 and F0
mode.
$vailable Values 10100 H]
'efault Setting 100 H]
154 RTTY DIAL STEP
Function Setting of the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob and the
[VF2-BCL$5] knob tuning speed in the 5TTY mode.
$vailable Values 110 H]
'efault Setting H]
155 SSB DIAL STEP
Function Setting of the 0ain Tuning 'ial knob and the
[VF2-BCL$5] knob tuning speed in the SSB mode.
$vailable Values 110 H]
'efault Setting 10 H]
156 AM CH STEP
Function Selects the tuning steps for the microphone’s
[U3]['W1] keys in the $0 mode.
$vailable Values .101. kH]
'efault Setting kH]
157 FM CH STEP
Function Selects the tuning steps for the microphone’s
[U3]['W1] keys in the F0 mode.
$vailable Values 6.101.0 kH]
'efault Setting kH]
158 1MHz/100kHz SELECT
Function Selects the tuning steps for the [VF2-B
CL$5] knob when the [0H]uT] button is pressed.
$vailable Values 10H]100kH]
'efault Setting 10H]
TX AUDIO GROUP
159 PRMTRC EQ1 FREQ
Function Selects the center freTuency of the lower
range for the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values 100 a 700 H] 100 H]step)
'efault Setting 00
You may adjust the eTuali]er gain and Q-factor at this
selected audio freTuency via menu items “
160 PRMTRC
EQ1 LEVEL
”
and “
161 PRMTRC EQ1 BWTH
”.
160 PRMTRC EQ1 LEVEL
Function $djusts the eTuali]er gain of the low range of
the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values
-
0 a 0 a 10
'efault Setting 0
161 PRMTRC EQ1 BWTH
Function $djusts the Q-factor of the low range of the
parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values 1 a 10
'efault Setting 1
162 PRMTRC EQ2 FREQ
Function Selects the center freTuency of the middle
range for the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values 700 a 100 H] 100 H]step)
'efault Setting 800
You may adjust the eTuali]er gain and Q-factor at this
selected audio freTuency via menu items “
163 PRMTRC
EQ2 LEVEL
”
and “
164 PRMTRC EQ2 BWTH
”
163 PRMTRC EQ2 LEVEL
Function $djusts the eTuali]er gain of the middle range
of the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values
-
0 a 0 a 10
'efault Setting 0
MENU MODE
Page 124 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
164 PRMTRC EQ2 BWTH
Function $djusts the eTuali]er gain of the middle range
of the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values 1 a 10
'efault Setting 1
165 PRMTRC EQ3 FREQ
Function Selects the center freTuency of the high range
for the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values 100 a 300 H] 100 H]step)
'efault Setting 100
You may adjust the eTuali]er gain and Q-factor in this
selected audio freTuency via menu items “
166 PRMTRC
EQ3 LEVEL
”
and “
167 PRMTRC EQ3 BWTH
”.
166 PRMTRC EQ3 LEVEL
Function $djusts the eTuali]er gain of the high range of
the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values
-
0 a 0 a 10
'efault Setting 
167 PRMTRC EQ3 BWTH
Function $djusts the Q-factor of the high range of the
parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values 1 a 10
'efault Setting 10
168 P-PRMTRC EQ1 FREQ
Function Selects the center freTuency of the lower
range for the parametric microphone eTuali]er when the
speech processor is activated.
$vailable Values 100 a 700 H] 100 H]step)
'efault Setting 00
You may adjust the eTuali]er gain and Q-factor at
this selected audio freTuency via menu items “
169
P-PRMTRC EQ1 LEVEL
”
and “
170 P-PRMTRC EQ1
BWTH
”.
169 P-PRMTRC EQ1 LEVEL
Function $djusts the eTuali]er gain of the low range of
the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values
-
0 a 0 a 10
'efault Setting -3
170 P-PRMTRC EQ1 BWTH
Function $djusts the Q-factor of the low range of the
parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values 1 a 10
'efault Setting
171 P-PRMTRC EQ2 FREQ
Function Selects the center freTuency of the middle
range for the parametric microphone eTuali]er when the
speech processor is activated.
$vailable Values 700 a 100 H] 100 H]step)
'efault Setting 800
You may adjust the eTuali]er gain and Q-factor at
this selected audio freTuency via menu items “
172
P-PRMTRC EQ2 LEVEL
”
and “
173 P-PRMTRC EQ2
BWTH
”.
172 P-PRMTRC EQ2 LEVEL
Function $djusts the eTuali]er gain of the middle range
of the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values
-
0 a 0 a 10
'efault Setting 0
173 P-PRMTRC EQ2 BWTH
Function $djusts the Q-factor of the middle range of
the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values 1 a 10
'efault Setting 1
174 P-PRMTRC EQ3 FREQ
Function Selects the center freTuency of the high range
for the parametric microphone eTuali]er when the
speech processor is activated.
$vailable Values 100 a 300 H] 100 H]step)
'efault Setting 100
You may adjust the eTuali]er gain and Q-factor at
this selected audio freTuency via menu items “
175
P-PRMTRC EQ3 LEVEL
”
and “
176 P-PRMTRC EQ3
BWTH
”.
175 P-PRMTRC EQ3 LEVEL
Function $djusts the eTuali]er gain of the low range of
the parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values
-
0 a 0 a 10
'efault Setting 
176 P-PRMTRC EQ3 BWTH
Function $djusts the Q-factor of the low range of the
parametric microphone eTuali]er.
$vailable Values 1 a 10
'efault Setting 1
MENU MODE
Page 125FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
TX GNRL GROUP
177 TX MAX POWER
Function Sets a transmitter output level.
$vailable Values a 100
'efault Setting 100
178 EXT AMP TUNING PWR
Function Selects a maximum output power limit
for driving the input circuit of an external linear 5F
ampli¿er while tuning while using the 5emote Control
function of the linear 5F ampli¿er).
$vailable Values 1000100
'efault Setting 100
179 TUNER SELECT
Function (nabledisable the optional FC-40 $ntenna
Tuner.
$vailable Values I1T(51$L(;T(51$L
'efault Setting I1T(51$L
I1T(51$L The [TU1(] button will activate the
internal $ntenna Tuner.
(;T(51$L The [TU1(] button will activate the
optional FC-40 $ntenna Tuner.
180 VOX SELECT
Function Selects the audio input source for triggering
T; during V2; operation.
$vailable Values 0IC'$T$
'efault Setting 0IC
0IC The V2; function will be activated by
microphone audio input.
'$T$ The V2; function will be activated by data
audio input port pin 1) of the 5TTY3.T -ack.
181 VOX GAIN
Function $djusts the “V2;” Gain on the SSB$0F0
modes.
$vailable Values 0 a 100
'efault Setting 0
182 VOX DELEY
Function $djusts the “V2;” 'elay receiver recovery)
time on the SSB$0F0 modes.
$vailable Values 30 a 3000 msec 10 msecstep)
'efault Setting 00 msec
183 ANTI VOX GAIN
Function $djusts the $nti-V2; Trip Gain, which is the
level of negative $F feedback of receiver audio to the
microphone, to prevent receiver audio from activating
the transmitter via the microphone) during V2;
operation.
$vailable Values 0 a 100
'efault Setting 0
184 EMERGENCY FREQ TX
Function (nables Tx5x operation on the $laska
(mergency Channel, 167. kH].
$vailable Values (1$BL('IS$BL(
'efault Setting 'IS$BL(
When this 0enu Item is set to “(1$BL(”,
the spot
freTuency of 167. kH] will be enabled. The $laska
(mergency Channel will be found between the 0emory
channels “3-1” and “01 or 1-01)”.
Important The use of this freTuency is restricted to
stations operating in or near $laska, and
only for emergency purposes never for
routine operations). See
§
7.401c) of the
FCC regulations for details.
AF SCOPE GROUP
185 FFT DISPLAY MODE
Function Selects the operation mode of the $udio
Scope 0onitor.
$vailable Values S3(CT5U0W$T(5 F$LL
'efault Setting S3(CT5U0
S3(CT5U0 The $udio Scope 0onitor shows the
audio signal on the Spectrum display.
W$T(5 F$LL The $udio Scope 0onitor shows the
audio signal on the Water Fall display.
186 FFT ATT
Function Selects the attenuation level of the $udio
Scope 0onitor.
$vailable Values 0100 dB
'efault Setting 10 dB
DEC CW
187 CW DECODE BW
Function Selects the bandwidth of the $FC feature.
$vailable Values 01000 H]
'efault Setting 100 H]
Page 126 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
E/D RTTY GROUP
188 RX USOS
Function (nables'isables the 5; US2S feature.
$vailable Values (1$BL('IS$BL(
'efault Setting (1$BL(
189 TX USOS
Function (nables'isables the T; US2S feature.
$vailable Values (1$BL('IS$BL(
'efault Setting (1$BL(
190 RX NEW LINE CODE
Function Selects the command code used for the
Carriage 5eturn during 5TTY receive.
$vailable Values C5,LF,C5LF C5LF
'efault Setting C5,LF,C5LF
191 TX AUTO CR+LF
Function (nables'isables the sending of the Carriage
5eturn C5LF) Code while transmitting in 5TTY.
$vailable Values (1$BL('IS$BL(
'efault Setting (1$BL(
192 TX DIDDLE
Function Selects the transmission code when there is
not a character to be transmitted.
$vailable Values 2FFBL$1.LT5S
'efault Setting BL$1.
193 BAUDOT CODE
Function Selects the Baudot Code used for the 5TTY
mode.
$vailable Values CCITTUS
'efault Setting US
E/D PSK GROUP
194 PSK MODE
Function Selects the operation mode of the 3S. mode.
$vailable Values B3S.Q3S.
'efault Setting B3S.
195 DECODE AFC RANGE
Function Selects the operation range or bandwidth) of
the $FC feature.
$vailable Values 8130
'efault Setting 1
196 QPSK POLARITY REV
Function Selects normal or reverse phase shift for the
Q3S. mode.
$vailable Values 5;-1, T;-1 5;-5, T;-1
5;-1, T;-5 5;-5, T;-5
'efault Setting 5;-1, T;-1
Page 127FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
FFT UNIT (FFT-1)
INSTALLATION OF OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
1. Turn the
FT
DX
1200
’s
[
POWER
]
switch “2FF”, and
turn off the external 'C power supply.
. 'isconnect all the cables from the
FT
DX
1200
.
3. 5eferring to Figure 1, remove the 18 screws
attaching the bottom case, then remove the bottom
case.
4. 5efer to Figure for the mounting location for the
FFT-1
.
. 3lace the
FFT-1
component side up), and then
secure the corners of the
FFT-1
with the 4 screws.
6. 5eferring to Figure 3, connect appropriate cables
to the 4-pin and 14-pin connectors on the
FFT-1
respectively.
7. 5eplace the bottom case and 18 screws.
8. Connect the antenna and 'C power supply to the
FT
DX
1200
.
FIGURE 1
F
IGURE 3
F
IGURE 2
FFT-1
Mounting location
Connector (4-pin)
Connector (14-pin)
Page 128 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
VOICE MEMORY UNIT (DVS-6)
INSTALLATION OF OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Connector (5-pin)
Connector (6-pin)
1. Turn the
FT
DX
1200
’s
[
POWER
]
switch “2FF”, and
turn off the external 'C power supply.
. 'isconnect all the cables from the
FT
DX
1200
.
3. 5eferring to Figure 1, remove the 18 screws
attaching the bottom case, then remove the bottom
case.
4. 5efer to Figure for the mounting location for the
DVS-6
.
. 3ush the
DVS-6
component side up) onto the pins
corresponding to its assigned mounting location on
the transceiver. Gently press the board down until it
is ¿rmly seated on the connectors.
6. 5eplace the bottom case and 18 screws.
7. Connect the antenna and 'C power supply to the
FT
DX
1200
.
FIGURE 1
F
IGURE 2
Connector (5-pin)
Connector (6-pin)
Page 129FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION OF OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
RF ȝTUNING KIT
The 5F Tuning .its provide ultra-sharp 5F selectivity for the front end of the transceiver. $ Very high Q tuned circuit
makes possible the narrow-band design. Three 5F Tuning .its are available. The
MTU-160
covers the 1.8 0H] band.
The
MTU-80/40
covers the 3. and 7 0H] bands. The
MTU-30/20
covers 10.1 and 14 0H] bands.
The narrow bandwidth is especially useful on the low bands, when many strong signals are being received via 1VIS
propagation 1ear Vertical-Incidence Signals) within a narrow bandwidth. The added protection for the receiver 5F
stages is especially helpful in preventing I0' and blocking.
DC IN
DC IN
ANT
ANT
GND
GND
μ-TUNE TO
μ-TUNE TO
μ-TUNE
FROM
μ-TUNE
FROM
RF Cable
(Supplied with RF μTUNING KIT)
RF Cable*RF Cable*
RF Cable*
RF Cable*
RF Cable (Supplied with RF μTUNING KIT)
CNTL Cable
(Supplied with RF μTUNING KIT)
*: Supplied with RF μTUNING KIT
CNTL Cable*CNTL Cable* CNTL Cable*
μ-TUNE
μ-TUNE
RF IN
RF IN
RF IN
RF IN
RF OUT
RF OUT
RF OUT
RF OUT
MULTI CONNECTION
SINGLE CONNECTION
Installation
$ssemble the 5F Tuning Unit according to the “5F
Tuning .it Installation 0anual” supplied with the 5F
Tuning .it.
Interconnections to FT
DX
1200
Connect each cable supplied with the 5F Tuning
.it) between the 5F Tuning Unit and the
FT
DX
1200
Transceiver.
Advice
The 5F connecting cables are color
coded black and gray) to assist in
properly connecting the 5F I1 and
5F 2UT jacks. See illustration)
$n improper connection will
not damage the 5F Tuning .it.
However, improper operation may
occur.
Connect the color-coded control
cable s) between the C1 TL
2 UT and C1 TL I1 jacks
see illustration). Confirm all
connections before turning on the
transceiver.
If the
FT
DX
1200
does not operate
and the freTuency display blinks
sometimes, confirm and correct
the “C1TL I1” and “C1TL 2UT”
connections on the 5F Tuning
Unit.
The order of connecting multiple
5F Tuning Units is not important.
Page 130 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION OF OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
FC-40 EXTERNAL AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER (FOR WIRE ANTENNA)
The
FC-40
makes use of the control circuitry built into the transceiver, which allows the operator to control and monitor
automatic operation of the
FC-40
, which mounts near the antenna feedpoint. The
FC-40
uses specially selected,
thermally stable components, and is housed in a waterproof case to withstand severe environmental conditions with high
reliability.
$ carefully-chosen combination of solid-state switching components and high-speed relays allows the
FC-40
to match
a wide variety of antennas to within a 1 SW5 on any amateur band freTuency 160 through 6 meters), typically in less
than eight seconds. Transmitter power reTuired for matching may be as little as 4 - 60 Watts, and matching settings are
automatically stored in memory for instant recall when the same freTuency range is selected later.
3lease see the
FC-40
2perating 0anual for detailed information.
Interconnections to FT
DX
1200
$fter mounting the
FC-40
, connect the cables from the
FC-40
to the $1T and TU1(5 jacks on the rear panel
of the
FT
DX
1200
Transceiver.
Antenna Cable (5 m)
Control Cable (5 m)
GND
ANT
Antenna Terminal
Install the supplied ferrite
core as close to the
connector as possible.
Wrap the ends of the waterproof
cap with the supplied sealing
tape to protect against moisture
ingress.
Note
When the
FC-40
is connected to the
FT
DX
1200
,
T; G1' pin ) of the TU1(5 jack and the
LI1($5 jack pin ) are common circuits.
Therefore, the maximum voltage at T; G1' pin
) of the LI1($5 jack must not exceed V.
Page 131FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION OF OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Setup the FT
DX
1200
The optional
FC-40
$utomatic $ntenna Tuner provides automatic tuning of a coaxial line to present nominal 0-ohm
impedance to the
FT
DX
1200
’s $1T jack.
Before operation can begin, you must instruct the
FT
DX
1200
microprocessor that the
FC-40
is being used. This is done
using the 0enu 0ode
FC-40 EXTERNAL AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER (FOR WIRE ANTENNA)
1. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to enter the 0enu mode.
. 5otate the
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select the 0enu Item “
179 TUNER SE-
LECT
”.
3. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button, then rotate the
[
VFO-
B/CLAR
]
knob or press the
S
T
button) to select
“
EXTERNAL
”.
4. 3ress the
[
SELECT
]
button.
. 3ress the
[
MENU
]
button to save the new setting and
exit to normal operation.
Operation
1. 3ress the
[
TUNE
]
button briefly to activate the
$utomatic $ntenna Tuner.
. The “
TUNER
” icon will appear in the TFT display.
3. 3ress and hold the
[
TUNE
]
button for one second
to begin automatic tuning. The transmitter will be
engaged, and the “
TUNER
” icon will blink while
tuning is in progress.
4. Tuning will stop automatically when a low SW5
is achieved. You may 3ress and hold the
[
TUNE
]
button for one second while tuning is in progress, to
cancel the automatic tuning.
. To disable the $utomatic $ntenna Tuner, press the
[
TUNE
]
button brieÀy again.
[
VFO-B/CLAR
]
Knob
[
MENU
]
Button
[
TUNE
]
Button
[
SELECT
]
Button
[
S
/
T
]
Button
NOTE:
Be sure to connect a good earth ground to the G1'
terminal of the
FC-40
.
The carrier signal transmits continuously while
tuning is in progress. 3lease monitor the operating
freTuency before beginning the tuning process. Be
sure you are not interfering with others who may
already be using the freTuency.
It is normal to hear the sound of the relays while
tuning is in progress.
If the impedance cannot be matched by the
FC-40
better than 1, and the “
TUNER
” icon blinks, the
microprocessor will not retain the tuning data for that
freTuency, as the
FC-40
presumes that you will want
to adjust or repair your antenna system to correct the
high SW5 condition.
Page 132 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION OF OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
SCU-17 USB INTERFACE UNIT
Commercial and free computer software is available for use in 5TTY, '$T$ 3S.) and C$T Computer $ided Trans-
ceiver) system communications. See the illustration below for connection to your computer.
N
OTE:
5efer to the
SCU-17
0anual for speci¿cation details.
SCU-17
USB Port
Connection Cable (Supplied w/SCU-17)
(MDIN6P-MDIN6P)
USB Cable (Supplied w/SCU-17)
(Type "A" Male to Type "B" Male)
FTDX1200
Setting Up for RTTY, DATA (PSK) Operation
Setting Up for CAT Operation
SCU-17
USB Port
RS-232C Cable (Supplied w/SCU-17)
USB Cable (Supplied w/SCU-17)
(Type "A" Male to Type "B" Male)
FTDX1200
Page 133FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION OF OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
+RZWR&RQ¿UPWKH,QVWDOODWLRQDQGWKH&203RUW1XPEHU
With the
SCU-17
and computer connected, con¿rm whether the virtual C20 driver has been installed successfully.
The example below is for Windows
®
7.
1. Click the Windows
®
“Start” button ĺ 5ight-click “Computer” ĺ Click “3roperties 5)”.
. Click “'evice 0anager” on the window that appears.
3. 2n the 'evice 0anager screen, double-click “3ort C20 L3T)”.
The
SCU-17
provides two virtual C20 ports an (nhanced C20 3ort and a Standard C20 3ort. These ports offer the
following functions.
U
C$T communications (nhanced C20 3ort
U
3TT control 5TS) Standard C20 3ort
U
FS. control 'T5) Standard C20 3ort
Select the C20 port numbers that were con¿rmed using the above procedure when performing software port con¿gura-
tion.
When operating 5TTY, set the Sound Card input) setting to “USB $udio C2'(C”.
When operating
'$T$, 3S. or $FS. modes, set the Sound Card input and output) settings to “USB $udio C2'(C”.
Caution:
U
If a “!” or “;” is displayed for the port on the 'evice 0anager, uninstall and reinstall the virtual C20 driver.
U
If an SCU-17 with a different serial number is connected and turned on, different C20 port numbers will be as-
signed to it, making it possible to perform individual C20 port con¿gurations for an additional
SCU-17
.
U
When using the USB cable to perform T; control, the transceiver may switch to transmit mode when the computer
is started.
U
$lways shut down the application on the computer before disconnecting the USB cable.
SCU-17 USB INTERFACE UNIT
Page 134 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
General
Rx Frequency Range 30 kH] - 6 0H] operating)
1.8 0H] - 4 0H] speci¿ed performance, $mateur bands only)
Tx Frequency Ranges 1.8 0H] - 4 0H] $mateur bands only)
Frequency Stability 0. ppm after 1 minute #14 F to 140 F [±10 C to 60 C])
Operating Temperature Range 14 F to 1 F ±10 C to 0 C)
Emission Modes $1$ CW), $3( $0), -3( LSB, USB), F3( F0),
F1B 5TTY), G1B 3S.31)
Frequency Steps 110 H] SSB, CW, $0), 100 H] F0)
Antenna Impedance 0 2hms, unbalanced
16.7 - 10 2hms, unbalanced 1.8 0H] - .7 0H])
 - 100 2hms, unbalanced 0 0H] - 4 0H])
Tuner 21, 1.8 0H] - 0 0H] $mateur bands, T
; only)
Power Consumption $pprox.) 5x no signal) 1.8 $
5x signal present) .1 $
Tx 100 W) 3 $
Supply Voltage 'C 13.8 V 10 1egative Ground)
Dimensions WxHx') 14.4” x 4.” x 1.3” 36 x 11 x 31 mm)
Weight $pprox.) 0. lbs . kg)
Transmitter
Power Output - 100 watts . -  watts $0 carrier)
Modulation Types -3( SSB) Balanced,
$3( $0) Low-Level (arly Stage),
F3( F0) Variable 5eactance
Maximum FM Deviation .0 kH]. kH]
Harmonic Radiation Better than ±60 dB 1.8 0H] - .7 0H] $mateur bands Harmonics)
Better than ±0 dB 1.8 0H] - .7 0H] $mateur bands 2thers)
Better than ±60 dB
0 0H] $mateur band)
SSB Carrier Suppression $t least 60 dB below peak output
Undesired Sideband Suppression $t least 60 dB below peak output
3rd-order IMD ±31 dB #14 0H] 100 watts 3(3
Bandwidth 3 kH] LSBUSB), 00 H] CW), 6 kH] $0), 16 kH] F0)
Audio Response SSB) 1ot more than ±6 dB from 300 to 700 H]
Microphone Impedance 600 2hms 00 to 10 k2hms)
SPECIFICATIONS
Page 135FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
Receiver
Circuit Type Triple-conversion Superheterodyne
Intermediate Frequencies 40.4 0H]
4 kH]
30 kH] SSB, CW, 5TTY, 3S.31, 3$C.(T)
4 kH] $0, F0, 3$C.(T-F0)
Sensitivity SSBCW BW .4 kH], 10 dB S11)
0.16 V 1.8 - 30 0H]) 5F $03 “21”)
0.1 V 0 - 4 0H]) 5F $03 “21”)
$0
BW 6 kH], 10 dB S11, 30 modulation #400 H])
V 0. - 1.8 0H]) 5F $03 “21”)
V 1.8 - 30 0H]) 5F $03 “21”)
1 V 0 - 4 0H]) 5F $03 “21”)
F0 BW 1 kH], 1 dB SI1$')
0. V 8 - 30 0H]) 5F
$03 “21”)
0.3 V 0 - 4 0H]) 5F $03 “21”)
There is no speci¿cation for freTuency ranges not listed.
Selectivity WI'TH Center) 0ode ±6 dB ±60 dB
CW5TTY3S.31 0. kH] or better 70 H] or less
SSB .4 kH] or better 3.6 kH] or less
$0 6 kH] or better 1 kH] or less
F0 1 kH] or better 30 kH] or less
Image Rejection 70 dB or better 1.8 0H] - 8 0H
] $mateur bands)
60 dB or better 0 0H] - 4 0H] $mateur band)
Maximum Audio Output . W into 4 2hms with 10 TH'
Audio Output Impedance 4 to 8 2hms 4 2hms nominal)
Conducted Radiation Less than 4 nW
6SHFL¿FDWLRQVDUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHLQWKHLQWHUHVWRIWHFKQLFDOLPSURYHPHQWZLWKRXWQRWLFHRUREOLJDWLRQDQGDUH
JXDUDQWHHGRQO\ZLWKLQWKHDPDWHXUEDQGV
SPECIFICATIONS
Page 136 FT
DX
1200 OPERATING MANUAL
NOTE
Disposal of your Electronic and Electric Equipment
3roducts with the symbol crossed-out wheeled bin) cannot be disposed as household waste.
(lectronic and (lectric (Tuipment should be recycled at a facility capable of handling these
items and their waste by products.
In (U countries, please contact your local eTuipment supplier representative or service center
for information about the waste collection system in your country.
1. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by YAESU MUSEN could void the user’s
authorization to operate this device.
2. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning, or readily being altered, by the User to operate
within the frequency bands allocated to the Domestic public Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22.
DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER
7KHVFDQQHUUHFHLYHULVQRWDGLJLWDOVFDQQHUDQGLVLQFDSDEOHRIEHLQJFRQYHUWHGRUPRGL¿HGLQWRDGLJLWDOVFDQQHU
receiver by any user.
WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE
SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW.
CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d
’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l
’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d
’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Copyright 2013
YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD.
All rights reserved
No portion of this manual
may be reproduced without
the permission of
YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD.
Printed in Japan
1306T-AY
… 66 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules
1

Forum

yaesu-ftdx1200

  • Green Light on VFO A and MEM is flashing and no audio. Even tried Factory Reset and still flashing. How do I fix this? Submitted on 6-12-2022 at 07:37

    Reply Report abuse


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Yaesu FTDX1200 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Yaesu FTDX1200 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 14,65 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info